PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 4

Transcription

1 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Reease 4 Instaation and Programming Comcode Issue 1 March 1997

2 Copyright 1997 Lucent Technoogies A Rights Reserved Comcode Printed in USA Issue 1 March 1997 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was compete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change. Your Responsibiity for Your System s Security To fraud is the unauthorized use of your teecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for exampe, persons other than your company s empoyees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company s behaf. Note that there may be a risk of to fraud associated with your teecommunications system, and if to fraud occurs, it can resut in substantia additiona charges for your teecommunications services. You and your System Manager are responsibe for the security of your system, such as programming and configuring your equipment, to prevent unauthorized use. The System Manager is aso responsibe for reading a instaation, instruction, and system administration documents provided with this product in order to fuy understand the features that can introduce risk of to fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk. Lucent Technoogies does not warrant that this product is immune from or wi prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier teecommunication services or faciities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technoogies wi not be responsibe for any charges that resut from such unauthorized use. Federa Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to compy with the imits for a Cass A digita device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rues. These imits are designed to provide reasonabe protection against harmfu interference when the equipment is operated in a commercia environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not instaed and used in accordance with the instruction manua, may cause harmfu interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residentia area is ikey to cause harmfu interference, in which case the user wi be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digita apparatus does not exceed the Cass A imits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference reguations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le Présent Apparei Numérique n émet pas de bruits radioéectriques dépassant es imites appicabe aux appareis numériques de a cass A préscrites dans e regement sur e brouiage radioéectrique édicté par e ministère des Communications du Canada. Trademarks PARTNER, PARTNER MAIL VS, PARTNER MAIL, MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, MLC-6, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, MDW 9010, and MDW 9030P are registered trademarks of Lucent Technoogies in the U.S. and other countries. Ordering Information Ca: Lucent Technoogies Pubications Center Voice Internationa Voice Fax Internationa Fax Write: Lucent Technoogies Pubications Center P.O. Box 4100 Crawfordsvie, IN Order: Document No , Issue 1, March 1997, Comcode Support Teephone Number In the continenta U.S., Lucent Technoogies provides a to-free customer hepine 24 hours a day. Ca the Lucent Technoogies Hepine at or your Lucent Technoogies authorized deaer if you need assistance when instaing, programming, or using your system. Consutation charges may appy. Outside the continenta U.S., contact your oca Lucent Technoogies authorized representative. Lucent Technoogies Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by to fraud and you need technica support or assistance, ca Technica Service Center To Fraud Intervention Hotine at WWW Home Page The WWW home page for Lucent Technoogies is

3 Important Safety Instructions WARNING: The foowing ist provides basic safety precautions that shoud aways be foowed when using the system: Read and understand a instructions. Foow a warnings and instructions marked on the product. Unpug a teephone connections before ceaning. DO NOT use iquid ceaners or aeroso ceaners. Use a damp coth for ceaning. This product shoud be serviced by (or taken to) a quaified repair center when service or repair work is required. DO NOT use this product near water, for exampe, in a wet basement ocation. DO NOT pace this product on an unstabe cart, stand, or tabe. Never push objects of any kind into sots or openings as they may touch dangerous votage points or short out parts that coud resut in a risk of fire or eectric shock. Never spi iquid of any kind on the product. Avoid using this product during an eectrica storm. There may be a remote risk of eectric shock from ightning. DO NOT use the teephone to report a gas eak in the vicinity of the eak. The product is provided with a three-wire grounding type pug. This is a safety feature. DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type pug. DO NOT stape or otherwise attach the AC power suppy cord to buiding surfaces. CAUTION: DO NOT bock or cover the ventiation sots and openings. They prevent the product from overheating. DO NOT pace the product in a separate encosure uness proper ventiation is provided. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

4 Contents About This Guide xi Purpose xi Terminoogy xi Key Sequences xii How to Use This Guide xiii Reference Materias xiv 1 Overview 1-1 Tutor Feature 1-3 Languages 1-4 Voice Messaging Services 1-4 Security Instaation 2-1 Before You Start 2-1 Instaing the PARTNER MAIL VS Modue Understanding Programming 3-1 Cmmunications System Programming 3-1 Voice Messaging System Programming Initia Programming 4-1 Overview 4-1 Voice Mai System Configurations 4-2 Initia Communications System Setup 4-3 Voice Messaging System Programming 4-6 Communications System Programming 4-19 Verifying System Operation 4-29 v

5 Contents 5 System Management 5-1 Genera Information 5-2 Language 5-8 Automated Attendant Service 5-18 Modifying Maiboxes 5-36 Line Coverage 5-52 Teephone Button Programming Troubeshooting 6-1 When You Need Hep 6-1 Automated Attendant Service 6-2 Ca Answer Service 6-6 Voice Mai Service 6-7 Language 6-11 A Specifications A-1 B FCC Information B-1 Federa Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Information B-1 IC Notification and Repair Information B-3 C Warranty Information C-1 Repair Information C-1 Lucent Technoogies Warranty and Limitation of Liabiity C-3 vi

6 Contents D Voice Messaging System Panning Forms D-1 E Communications System Panning Forms E-1 F Case Studies F-1 Purpose F-1 Case Study #1 F-2 Case Study #2 F-21 GL Gossary GL-1 IN Index IN-1 Menu Map Programming Fowchart System Programming Reference vii

7 Figures 1 Overview Voice Messaging Services Immediate and Deayed Ca Handing Instaation Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER Sampe Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems Instaing the Maibox Expansion Card Understanding Programming Programming Menus System Management Language Menu Automated Attendant Service Menu Modifying Maiboxes Dia Pan for PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER Dia Pan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems Line Ownership 5-53 ix

8 About This Guide Purpose This guide provides instructions for instaing, upgrading, programming, and managing the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System on the PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, or PARTNER Advanced Communications System (ACS). It is intended for the technician who instas the hardware and programs the initia system settings and for the System Manager, the person who is responsibe for managing the system on an on-going basis. Terminoogy This guide uses the foowing terms: Voice messaging system (VMS): the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System. Subscribers: a user who has a maibox on the voice messaging system. Communications system (CS): in most countries, Reease 3.1 or ater of the PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48 systems, or Reease 1.0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System. In the U.K., Reease 2.0 or ater of the PARTNER Pus and PARTNER 48 systems. System phones: the teephones specificay designed to work with the communications system, incuding (where avaiabe) the PARTNER-34D, PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER 6, MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, MLC-6, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, MDW 9010, and MDW 9030P. xi

9 About This Guide Key Sequences This guide instructs you to press key sequences on the teephone s diapad to perform tasks. Each sequence incudes a number. If the keys on your diapad aso have etters, the number in the sequence is equivaent to a etter associated with the task in Engish. For exampe, to deete a message from your maibox, you press [ ] [ 3 ], which is equivaent to [ ] [ D ] on the diapad. The numerica key sequences and their associated etter sequences are isted beow for your reference: Deete [ ] [ 3 ] [ ] [ D ] Hep [ ] [ 4 ] [ ] [ H ] Restart [ ] [ 7 ] [ ] [ R ] Transfer [ ] [ 8 ] [ ] [ T ] Exit [ ] [ ] [ 9 ] [ ] [ ] [ X ] xii

10 About This Guide How to Use This Guide f you are the technician, refer to the appropriate chapters to hep you: Insta the voice messaging system hardware. Chapter 2 provides instructions for instaing and upgrading the voice messaging system modue in the communication system s contro unit. It aso provides instructions for instaing the Maibox Expansion Card. Refresh your memory about programming. Chapter 3 offers genera programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system. Perform initia programming. Chapter 4 provides step-by-step programming instructions for integrating the voice messaging system with the communications system. It aso provides test procedures that you shoud use after instaation to ensure that the system is working propery. Sove probems. Chapter 6 provides information to hep you identify and correct probems you may have with the voice messaging system. If you are the System Manager, refer to the appropriate chapters to hep you: Learn about the voice messaging system. Chapter 1 describes the voice messaging system s features and services. Learn about programming. Chapter 3 offers genera programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system. Manage the voice messaging system. Chapter 5 provides instructions for changing system settings to accommodate the changing needs of the business. It aso offers guideines for setting up and using the receptionist s extension. Sove probems. Chapter 6 provides information to hep you identify and correct probems you may have with the voice messaging system. After you are experienced with the system, use the Tabe of Contents or Index to ocate the information you need. This guide contains some information about communications system features as we as voice messaging system features. For detaied information about a specific communications system feature, refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. xiii

11 About This Guide Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a CAUTION: Indicates the presence of a hazard that wi or can cause minor persona injury or propery damage if the hazard is not avoided. WARNING: Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fata persona injury if the hazard is not avoided. How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is ocated at the end of this guide, after the appendixes. If the form is missing, send your comments and recommendations for changes to Pubications Manager, Lucent Technoogies, 211 Mount Airy Road (Room 2W-226), Basking Ridge, NJ (FAX ). xiv

12 About This Guide Reference Materias In addition to this guide, the foowing materias are avaiabe (the order numbers are in parentheses) for the voice messaging system: Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System ( ) Tutor Labes ( ) To order these materias, ca the Lucent Technoogies BCS Pubications Center at in the continenta U.S. or at Some of these materias aso are avaiabe in other anguages. For more information about these materias or about communications system materias, contact the BCS Pubications Center, your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer. xv

13 Overview 1 Contents Tutor Feature Languages Voice Messaging Services Automated Attendant Service Communications System Features Affecting Automated Attendant Service Group Ca Distribution VMS Hunt Schedue VMS Hunt Deay Transfer Return Extension Automated Attendant Service Scenarios Music On Hod Ca Answer Service Communications System Features Affecting Ca Answer Service VMS Extension Coverage Immediate VMS Extension Coverage (Do Not Disturb) Line Coverage Voice Maibox Transfer Voice Mai Service Maiboxes Guest Maiboxes Security System Security Guideines Security Poicy and User Education i

14 Overview 1 The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System is designed to work with the communications system to automate the ca handing needs of the business. The voice messaging system: Expands easiy and supports four configurations to accommodate growth and ensure optima performance. The basic system configuration consists of 2 voice channes (ports) and 10 maiboxes. Any one of three optiona Maibox Expansion Cards may be instaed to increase the number of ports and/or subscribers. These configurations incude: 2 ports and 20 maiboxes, 4 ports and 20 maiboxes, and 4 ports and 40 maiboxes. Handes up to two cas (in the 2-port configuration) or four cas (in the 4-port configuration) simutaneousy and provides service for a predetermined number of subscribers. Answers outside cas, pays a customized message prompting the caer to press digits for the party with whom the caer wants to speak, and efficienty routes the ca to the appropriate party a without the aid of a receptionist. Aows outside caers to hear a voice prompts and customized messages in the anguage seected for the system. And in biingua mode, caers can choose between two anguages seected for the system. Aows you to create up to two Automated Attendant Announcements (in each anguage seected for the system). For exampe, you can offer caers a choice of a standard business hours/ocation announcement or a frequenty updated announcement featuring specia offers. Aows caers to eave a private message if the caed party does not answer or is busy on another ca, or to transfer to another system extension or the receptionist s extension for assistance. 1-1

15 Overview Aows subscribers to retrieve messages from any touch-tone phone on the premises or from a remote ocation. And the system informs subscribers how many of these messages are new and how many are od (previousy saved) messages. Aows subscribers to forward messages with comment to one or more maiboxes on the system. Aows System Managers to impement the anguage that subscribers choose for their own maibox use. Aows subscribers to have the system outca a specific teephone or pager number according to a predefine schedue whenever a new message is received. (Note that this feature is avaiabe to subscribers ony when it is administered for them by their System Manager.) Provides after-hours service in addition to daytime service. NOTE: Outcaing, Automated Attendant Announcements, and Message Forward features are introduced with this new reease of PARTNER MAIL VS. The abiity to expand the standard 2-port, 10-maibox configuration to any one of three other configurations with the instaation of the appropriate Maibox Expansion Card is aso a new feature of Reease 4. In addition, the voice messaging system offers a buit-in Tutor feature, which is discussed in the next section. 1-2

16 Overview Tutor Feature Tutor is an on-ine hep feature that aows users to easiy access and isten to information about commony-used communications system features. Any user can access the Tutor users do not have to be voice messaging system subscribers. Tutor provides information about the foowing subjects: System phone features such as ringing patterns, voume contro, speakerphone, dispay, buttons, and ights. Various types of interna cas incuding group paging cas, voice interrupt on busy cas, and hands-free answer on intercom cas. System features such as Conference, Transfer, Auto Diaing, Persona Speed Diaing, Last Number Redia, and Save Number Redia. To access the Tutor menu, users simpy make a ca to the voice messaging system. The system pays: Wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter extension and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4. When users dia [ ] [ 4 ], they hear instructions for using Tutor, foowed by a ist of topics and subtopics. The user can then enter the topic and subtopic numbers of their choice. Refer to Using the Tutor Feature in Chapter 5 for a ist of topic and subtopic numbers. Instruction abes, which are designed for pacement in the handset crade on the base of the system phone, are shipped with the voice messaging system hardware. 1-3

17 Overview Languages The voice messaging system supports mutipe anguages. You can choose to have outside caers hear a voice prompts and customized messages in one of the supported anguages (Monoingua Mode) or you can et outside caers choose between two anguages preseected for the system by the System Manager (Biingua Mode). When the system operates in Monoingua Mode, the anguage you choose for voice prompts is referred to as the System Language. When the system operates in Biingua Mode, the anguage you choose for voice prompts when cas are first answered is referred to as the Primary Language. Outside caers then have the option of switching to the Secondary Language for the remainder of the ca. Voice Messaging Services The voice messaging system provides three types of service: Automated Attendant Service. Answers outside cas and transfers them to the destination seected by the caer or pays an Announcement seected by the caer. Ca Answer Service. Aows the caer to eave a message or to transfer to another extension if the caed party is busy or does not answer. Voice Mai Service. Aows subscribers to isten to messages and manage their own maibox. Figure 1-1 provides an overview of the features associated with each service. 1-4

18 Overview PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Automated Attendant Service Ca Answer Service Voice Mai Service Prompts caer to make a choice Prompts caer to eave a message Aows subscribers to: from a menu of options, then or transfer to another extension Listen to messages transfers the ca to the seected when the caed party does not Forward messages with destination, or announcements. answer. comment to other maiboxes Deete messages Set up outcaing to a pager or teephone number Record persona greeting(s) Change their password VMS Hunt Schedue Aways Day Ony Night Ony VMS Extension Coverage VMS Line Coverage Voice Maibox Transfer Communications system aways routes cas to Automated Attendant Service. Communications system routes Cas to Automated Attendant Service when Night Service is off. Communications system routes cas to Automated Attendant Service when Night Service is on. Caer hears the caed party s persona greeting and can eave a message. Caer hears the ine owner s persona greeting and can eave a message. System users press a button to transfer caers directy to a voice maibox without ringing the extension first. VMS Hunt Deay Immediate Ca Handing Deayed Ca Handing Automatic VMS Coverage Manua VMS Coverage Send A Cas Automated Attendant The receptionist answers Service answers outside outside cas. Cas not cas immediatey. The answered by the third ring receptionist acts as a back go to the Automated -up for unanswered cas. Attendant Service. Subscribers have voice mai coverage on a the time at their Extension. Subscribers can turn voice mai coverage on and off at their Extension. Subscribers can use Do Not Disturb in conjunction with automatic or manua VMS coverage. Doing so enabes caers to receive Ca Answer Service immediatey cas do not ring the extension first Figure 1-1. Voice Messaging Services 1-5

19 Overview Automated Attendant Service The Automated Attendant Service can answer and route outside cas without assistance from a receptionist. After an outside ca is answered, the Automated Attendant Service pays a customized message (caed the menu prompt). Typicay the message wecomes caers to et them know they have reached the correct number then offers caers a menu of options for transferring to the desired party or istening to an Announcement. (It is recommended that the menu offer not more than five options to avoid confusing caers.) You can record up to two Announcements in Monoingua Mode (or up to two Announcements for each anguage in Biingua Mode). Announcements are often used to answer frequenty asked questions, such as business hours and ocation, emergency service, specia offers, etc. Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in ength. Caers can choose to isten to these Announcements, so your staff has more time to answer other cas and perform other tasks. You can customize the menu prompt for use during norma business hours (caed the Day Menu Prompt) and for use after norma business hours (caed the Night Menu Prompt). For exampe, you can set up Automated Attendant Service so that caers hear the foowing prompt during the day if the system is set for Monoingua Mode and the System Language is U.S. Engish: Thank you for caing the ANY Trave Agency. If you know the extension you want, dia it now or press 0 to speak with the receptionist. For information on this month s specia trave package, press 3. For directions to ANY Trave Agency, press 4. To speak to an agent about Corporate Trave, press 5. Press * 4 to repay this message. Note that caers who want genera information regarding the current discount trave package or agency ocation can choose to isten to an Announcement. For exampe, when caers press [ 3 ] they hear the foowing Announcement: Are you tired of batting the ice, snow, and after- Christmas sae crowds? Take advantage of our January sunny escape package-3 days and 2 nights in San Juan, Puerto Rico for $439 per person, incuding hote and airfare. To speak to an agent about this package or other winter getaways, press * 8 and extension 13. For after-hours caers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to pay this prompt: You have reached the ANY Trave Agency. Our hours are 8 to 5, Monday through Friday. Pease press 9 to eave a message and we wi return your ca when the office opens. 1-6

20 Overview For a system set for Biingua Mode, the Day Menu Prompt shoud et caers know that they can switch from the Primary Language to the Secondary Language. Note that caers can aso press [ ] [ 1 ] whie istening to an Automated Attendant Announcement to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages. In the foowing exampe, the Primary Language is Latin American Spanish and the Secondary Language is U.S. Engish: Gracias por amar a Software México. For Engish, press * 1. Si usted tiene teéfono de tonos y conoce e número de extensión, marqueo ahora. De o contrario, espere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora. For after-hours caers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to pay this prompt: Gracias por amar a Software México. For Engish, press * 1. Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 a 14:30 horas y de 16 a 18 horas. Si usted tiene teéfono de tonos y conoce e número de a extensión a a que desea amar, marqueo ahora. De o contrario, espere y deje un mensaje con a operadora. NOTE: When the system is instaed initiay, Automated Attendant Service has this factory-set Day Menu Prompt: Heo, wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter the extension number of the person you wish to reach or press 0 to reach the receptionist. n addition, Automated Attendant Service has this factory-set Night Menu Prompt: Good Evening. Wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter the extension number of the person you wish to reach, or press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. Automated Attendant Service is usefu for many businesses, such as car deaerships, insurance agencies, and stores. For exampe, a car deaership can use Automated Attendant Service to aow its customers to reach the customer service department directy. This frees saes peope to hande customer transactions whie the Automated Attendant Service transfers service cas to the appropriate department. n this case, the Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to prompt the caer to enter a singe digit to reach any avaiabe customer service representative. 1-7

21 Overview Communications System Features Affecting Automated Attendant Service When panning Automated Attendant Service, you must choose settings for the foowing communications system features: Group Ca Distribution. Specifies the outside ines that are to be answered by Automated Attendant Service. VMS Hunt Schedue. Specifies when the communications system is to route cas to the Automated Attendant Service. VMS Hunt Deay. Specifies whether the Automated Attendant Service is to provide immediate or deayed ca handing. Transfer Return Extension. Specifies how unanswered cas are transferred by the voice mai system. Each of these features is expained briefy beow. For more information about these communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system. Group Ca Distribution This feature ets you specify the outside ines for which you want Automated Attendant Service coverage. You can specify some or a of your ines. VMS Hunt Schedue This feature determines when the communications system is to route cas to the Automated Attendant Service. VMS Hunt Schedue works in conjunction with the communication system s Night Service feature so that the voice messaging system can pay the appropriate menu prompt. In other words, the menu prompt the caer hears depends on the VMS Hunt Schedue setting you seect and the status of the Night Service button at the receptionist s extension. You can choose one of the foowing VMS Hunt Schedue settings: Aways (factory setting). Routes outside cas to Automated Attendant Service a the time. When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt pays; when Night Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt pays. Day Ony. Routes outside cas to Automated Attendant Service ony when Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt pays. Night Ony. Routes outside cas to Automated Attendant Service ony when Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt pays. 1-8

22 Overview VMS Hunt Deay This option specifies either immediate or deayed ca handing(see Figure 1-2): Immediate (factory setting). The Automated Attendant Service answers outside cas on the second ring and pays the Day or Night Menu Prompt. The receptionist can act as backup. Caers using rotary phones or caers requesting assistance can be transferred to the receptionist s extension. Deayed. The Automated Attendant Service answers outside cas after the fourth ring. This deay gives the receptionist time to answer the ca. The VMS Hunt Deay setting you seect is used for both day and night operation. Immediate Ca Handing Incoming Cas Contro Unit PARTNER MAIL VS Receptionist answers on backs up the second ring PARTNER MAIL VS Deayed Ca Handing Incoming Cas Contro Unit Receptionist PARTNER MAIL VS answers incoming picks up unanswered cas cas on the fourth ring Figure 1-2. Immediate and Deayed Ca Handing 1-9

23 Overview Transfer Return Extension For extensions associated with the mai system unit, this option specifies how unanswered cas are transferred by the voice mai system. If the mai system transfers a ca to an extension that has no Voice Mai coverage, or if Voice Mai coverage is Off, and that extension does not answer, the communications system transfers the ca to the Transfer Return Extension. For extensions that do not have Voice Mai coverage, this option can be programmed to ensure that unanswered cas transferred by the mai system return to the designated extension, where they ring unti answered. Automated Attendant Service Scenarios The foowing sampe scenarios iustrate typica ways in which Automated Attendant Service is set up with the communications system features: Case 1: The receptionist is the primary ca hander. Automated Attendant Service handes overfow. a. b. Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Aways. c. Use Group Ca Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the ines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service. Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) to Deayed. Case 2: Automated Attendant Service is the primary ca hander. a. b. c. Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) to Immediate. d. Use Group Ca Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the ines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service. Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Aways. Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for a PARTNER MAIL VS extensions. (When VMS Hunt Deay is set to Immediate, you can use this feature to prevent users from accidentay picking up cas sent to the voice mai system.) Case 3: The receptionist answers cas during the day; Automated Attendant Service answers cas at night. a. b. c. Use Group Ca Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the ines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service. Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Night Ony. Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) to Immediate. 1-10

24 Overview Music On Hod If you use Automated Attendant Service, you aso may want to use the communications system s Music On Hod feature. When Music On Hod is Active and an audio source is connected to the system, caers waiting to be transferred hear music or recorded materia. If Music On Hod is Not Active, caers hear tones, ringing, or sience (depending on how the communications system is set up) whie they are being transferred. For more information, see Music On Hod and Ring on Transfer in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. Ca Answer Service This service offers caers the foowing options when they reach an extension that is unabe to answer their ca: If the system is in Biingua Mode, press [ ] [ 1 ] whie istening to the persona greeting to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages. Leave a detaied, confidentia message in the caed party s maibox. Press [ 0 ] to transfer to the receptionist s extension for assistance. Press [ ] [ 8 ] to transfer to another system extension. Caers can press [ 0 ] or [ ] [ 8 ] before, during, or after eaving a message. NOTE: Unti subscribers record a persona greeting for their maibox, outside caers hear this factory-set message in either the System Language (Monoingua Mode) or the Primary Language (Biingua Mode): Extension XX is not avaiabe. To eave a message, wait for the tone. After recording hang up or press 1 for more options. 1-11

25 Overview Communications System Features Affecting Ca Answer Service Ca Answer Service works with the foowing communications system features: VMS Extension Coverage Do Not Disturb Line Coverage Voice Maibox Transfer Each of these features is expained briefy beow. For more information on these communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system. VMS Extension Coverage VMS Extension Coverage may be either automatic or manua. Automatic VMS Coverage: When the communications system s Automatic VMS Cover feature is Assigned for an extension, intercom and transferred caers can eave messages or transfer to another extension when the caed person does not answer by the fourth ring (or by the number of rings specified with the communications system s VMS Cover Rings (#117)* feature). The system greets the caer with the subscriber s persona greeting (or with the system greeting if a persona greeting is not recorded). If the system is in Biingua Mode and the subscriber recorded a persona greeting in two anguages, the caer can switch between the two anguages by pressing [ ] [ 1 ]. Manua VMS Coverage: Regardess of the Automatic VMS Cover setting, the communications system aows subscribers to press a programmed button to turn voice mai coverage on and off at their extension. To make this possibe, the VMS Cover feature must be programmed on a button with ights on the subscriber s system phone. Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb button can be used to prevent cas for the extensions from audiby aerting (ights sti fash). Subscribers (with communications system 4.0 or ater) who have VMS Extension Coverage either automatic or manua can use this communications system feature when they want cas sent to their maiboxes immediatey. Line Coverage Line Coverage ets caers who ca in on a covered ine eave messages in the maibox of a specific subscriber (known as the owner of the covered ine). When a ca comes in on a covered ine, the system routes the caer directy to the ine owner s maibox if the ca is not answered. The caer has the option of eaving a message or transferring to another extension. * VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 1-12

26 Overview Voice Mai Service Line ownership typicay is assigned to persona ines or to ines to be used for outside access to the voice messaging system when Automated Attendant Service is not used. (Lines in the system can be assigned either Line Coverage or Automated Attendant Service coverage a singe ine cannot be assigned both types of coverage.) Voice Maibox Transfer A Voice Maibox Transfer button can be programmed on a user s phone to transfer caers directy to a subscriber s maibox without ringing the extension first. This feature is usefu when a user is handing cas for a subscriber who is not at his or her desk. This service aows subscribers to manage their own maiboxes. With it, a subscriber can: Listen to messages, then save or deete them. Record a persona greeting (in Biingua Mode, the user may record his or her persona greeting in both the Primary and Secondary Languages) Change the defaut password for his or her maibox to ensure that messages are kept confidentia. Forward messages with comment to another subscriber s maibox Have the system outca a specified teephone or pager number according to a predefined schedue whenever a new message is received. Transfer to another extension or to the receptionist s extension. A subscriber s extension number and maibox number are the same. When a caer eaves a message, the voice messaging system paces the message in the subscriber s maibox and turns on the message ight (if avaiabe) at the subscriber s phone. If the subscriber has Outcaing privieges, the system wi ca the programmed teephone or pager number if the message is received during the hours specified in the subscriber s Outcaing schedue and Outcaing is turned on. Subscribers can retrieve messages at their convenience from any touch-tone phone either whie on-site or from an off-site ocation. The system informs subscribers of the number of new and od (saved) messages in their maiboxes, and pays new messages first. Subscribers can refer to Using PARTNER MAIL VS for instructions on recording a persona greeting, changing a password, forwarding a message, specifying a teephone or pager number and schedue for Outcaing, and performing other Voice Mai Service procedures. Voice Mai Service aso aows the System Manager to program the voice messaging system. See Voice Messaging System Programming in Chapter 3 for more information. 1-13

27 Overview When subscribers ca into the Voice Mai Service, they hear this factory-set prompt in either the System Language (Monoingua Mode) or the Primary and Secondary Language (Biingua Mode): Wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter extension and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4. The System Manager can change, on a per maibox basis, the anguage subscribers hear after they access their maiboxes. The Maibox Language is used for voice prompts for recording a persona greeting, retrieving messages, and other Voice Mai services. The Maibox Language can be different from the System Language seected in Monoingua Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages seected in Biingua Mode. Maiboxes The voice messaging system provides a predetermined number of maiboxes which are assigned to extensions in order beginning with extension 10. For exampe, the system may have 10 defaut maiboxes for extensions 10 through 19. If a Maibox Expansion Card is instaed, the number of defaut maiboxes is increased; for exampe, instaation of a Maibox Expansion Card coud increase the number of defaut maiboxes to 20, for extensions 10 through 29. Maibox Expansion Cards can aso aow for configurations consisting of four ports and 20 maiboxes, and four ports and 40 maiboxes. The System Manager can change defaut maibox assignments. First, deete maiboxes for any extensions that do not require voice mai coverage. Then, create maiboxes for extensions that need them. Note that the maibox assigned to extension 10, the receptionist s extension, cannot be deeted. NOTE: Maiboxes shoud be deeted from extensions that connect auxiiary equipment (such as fax machines or doorphones) to keep the maximum number of maiboxes avaiabe for users and to safeguard system security. Guest Maiboxes The System Manager can create guest maiboxes for users who do not have their own phone, but sti require maiboxes. If this is the case, either the Automated Attendant Service or system users can transfer a caer directy to the guest maibox where the caer can eave a message. Guests can ca the voice messaging system from any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages. For more information on guest maiboxes, see Guest Maiboxes in Chapter

28 Overview Security The System Manager is responsibe for the security of the system. It is important that you fuy understand and appropriatey administer this product to reduce your risk of incurring charges that resut from unauthorized use of the system. Under the aw, you, the customer are responsibe for paying part or a of those unauthorized cas. Be aware that criminas caed hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized access to your communications system and your voice mai system. Hackers often try to trick a company s empoyees into providing them with access to an outside ine or an outside operator. They may aso concentrate their activities in two areas reated to the mai system: They try to dia into a maibox, then execute a transfer by diaing [ ] [ 8 ]. Then they dia an access code, foowed by a digit string to either direct dia or access a network operator to compete the ca. They try to ocate unused or unprotected maiboxes and use them as drop-off points for their own messages. System Security Guideines To reduce the risk of unauthorized use of your communications and voice mai systems, you shoud require that the System Manager s Password be changed from the factory setting. Use a hard-to-guess vaue. deete any unused maiboxes immediatey. require a empoyees who have voice maiboxes to use passwords to protect their maiboxes. permit no Outcaing or permit this priviege ony for those with egitimate business need. advise subscribers to change their passwords (a 4-digit password is recommended) when they og into the Voice Mai Service for the first time and frequenty thereafter. Subscribers can refer to the instructions for changing their passwords in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS. famiiarize yoursef with the impact of the Outcaing feature on system performance and security. If Outcaing is not permitted on the system, Outgoing Ca Restriction shoud be set to Inside Ony for the voice mai system extensions. It is strongy recommended that you use the communications system Ca Restriction features (that is, Outgoing Ca Restriction used with Aowed and Disaowed Lists) to restrict Outcaing numbers. See Outgoing Ca Restriction in Chapter 4 for detais. monitor your ca reporting system records of outgoing cas to identify possibe system abuse. 1-15

29 Overview You shoud aso provide effective physica security for the room containing your teecommunications equipment and the room with administrative toos, records, and System Administration information. These areas shoud be ocked when unattended. provide a secure trash disposa for a sensitive information, incuding your company s teephone directories, ca accounting records, or anything that may suppy information about your communications system. This trash shoud be shredded. Security Poicy and User Education As part of your responsibiity for protecting system security, you shoud estabish and communicate security poicies for a system users. You shoud et users know what measures they shoud take to protect system security and expain how hackers may try to gain access to the system. In particuar, you shoud provide users with the foowing information: A reports of troube, requests to move extensions, or any other administrative detais associated with the communications system or the voice mai system shoud be handed by one person (the System Manager) or within one department. Anyone caiming to be a teephone company representative shoud be referred to this person or department. If a caer caims to be an authorized teephone company representative, verify his or her identity before permitting that person any access to the system. Estabish we-controed poicies for passwords: Estabish a specific date for changing passwords (for exampe, the first of each month) and hep users remember to do it. Advise subscribers to use a 4-digit password. Te users that passwords shoud not be recyced. They shoud be hard to guess and shoud not contain: a the same numbers (for exampe, 4444) sequentia characters (for exampe, 1234) persona information that can be associated with them (such as their name, birthdate, teephone number, or socia security number) Discourage the practice of writing down passwords. If a password needs to be written down, keep it in a secure pace and never discard it whie it is sti active. Te users never to program passwords onto Auto Dia buttons. Dispay phones revea the programmed numbers. Educate empoyees that hackers may try to trick them into providing them with dia tone or diaing a number for them. 1-16

30 Overview Ask users to te you if any of the foowing suspicious activity occurs: inabiity to og into Voice Mai ost mai messages or atered greetings inabiity to get an outside ine sudden increase in wrong numbers caer compaints that your ines are busy series of cas where there is sience on the other end or the caer hangs up caers caiming to represent the phone company. Ask for a caback number. caers trying to obtain sensitive information or asking for assistance in pacing outside or ong-distance cas. Ask for a caback number. increases in interna requests for assistance in making outside cas (particuary internationa cas or requests for dia tone). Make users with Outcaing privieges aware of the potentia risks and their responsibiities. Never distribute the office teephone directory to anyone outside the company. Coect od office teephone directories and shred them. Never discuss your teephone system s numbering pan with anyone outside your company. Any time a ca appears to be suspicious, ca the Technica Service Center at (in the U.S.). 1-17

31 Instaation 2 Contents Before You Start Instaing the PARTNER MAIL VS Modue i

32 Instaation 2 This chapter provides instructions for instaing the voice messaging system s hardware in the communications system s contro unit. Before You Start Refer to Appendix A to verify that you have the appropriate voice messaging system and communications system hardware. Then Make sure the communications system contro unit, processor modue(s), and ine/extension modues have been instaed. Make sure this instaation meets the environmenta and eectrica requirements isted in Appendix A of this guide. 2-1

33 Instaation Instaing the PARTNER MAIL VS Modue To insta the voice messaging system modue in the communications system s contro unit: 1. Turn off power to the communications system s contro unit: either pu out the main circuit breaker on the upper right rear corner of the contro unit or move the on/off switch to the off position, or remove the power cord from the AC outet. CAUTION: Faiure to turn off power may damage the contro unit and/or the voice messaging system. 2. Insta the voice messaging system modue in the first avaiabe sot to the right of the ast instaed 206 or 400 modue. Do not insta the voice messaging system modue in the first sot of the PARTNER Pus system contro unit or the PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system primary carrier (see Figure 2-1). NOTE: The voice messaging system modue shoud aways be instaed after the 206 and 400 modues to ensure consecutive extension numbering. If the contro unit is upgraded with more 206 or 400 modues, the voice messaging system modue shoud be removed, the new modues shoud be instaed, and the voice messaging system modue shoud be repaced in the first avaiabe sot after the 206 and 400 modues. The VMS Hunt Group Extensions and Transfer Return Extensions must then be reprogrammed (see Chapter 4). On the PARTNER Advanced Communications System, you must insta the voice messaging system modue in the sot to the right of the PARTNER ACS modue in the 2-sot carrier. If your system has a 5-sot carrier, you may insta the voice messaging system modue in any sot except the center sot (see Figure 2-2). Push sowy but firmy in the center of the modue unti the modue ocks into pace, and is attached to the rear of the backpane. Do not force the modue. If it does not insert easiy, remove the modue, cear any obstruction, and reinsert it. 2-2

34 Instaation 3. Refer to Figure 2-1 or Figure 2-2 for your system, then record the extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS modue on Form B1 of the System Panner for the communications system. PARTNER Pus Contro Unit or PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Expansion Carrier 2-port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These Exts. To Hunt Group 7: ,21 26,27 32,33 38,39 44,45 50,51 56,57 4-port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These Exts. To Hunt Group 7: , 19, 20,21 24, 25, 30, 31, 36, 37, 26, 27 32, 33 38, 39 42, 43, 48, 49, 44, 45 50, 51 54, 55, 56, 57 Figure 2-1. Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER

35 Instaation 2-Sot Carrier ACS Processor Modue 5-Sot Carrier ACS Processor Modue Line Jacks Line Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks 2-port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These 22,23 Exts. To Hunt Group 7: 2 2-port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These 22, 23 28, 29 34, 35 40, 41 Exts. To Hunt Group 7: 4-port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These 20, 21, Exts. To Hunt Group 7: 22, port Systems If PARTNER MAIL VS Is Instaed In Sot: Then Assign These 20, 21, 26, 27, 32, 33, 38, 39, Exts. To Hunt Group 7: 22, 23 28, 29 34, 35 40, 41 Figure 2-2. Sampe Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems 2-4

36 Instaation (Reserved for Future Use) RS-232 Port (Factory Use Ony) Power Indicator (Green) LED Sot for Optiona Maibox Expansion Card Test (Yeow) LED Status (Red) LED Hard Disk Drive (Green) LED Figure 2-3. Instaing the Maibox Expansion Card To insta the Maibox Expansion Card, insert the card in the vertica sot on the ower front of the voice messaging system modue (see Figure 2-3). Make sure the arrows on the Maibox Expansion Card abe face up and in. Aso make sure the card is pushed in a the way. Turn on power to the contro unit. The green Power LED shoud ight if it does, skip to Step 6. If the green Power LED does not ight, power down the contro unit, reseat the voice messaging system modue, then power up the contro unit again. If the green Power LED sti does not ight, ca for support as indicated on the inside front cover of this guide. Next, the voice messaging system modue performs sef-diagnostic tests. The LEDs work as foows: LED Green Power Yeow Test Red Status State ON ON ON for approximatey 2 seconds 2-5

37 Instaation After approximatey 10 seconds when the tests are competed, the yeow Test LED goes off. When this occurs, check the red Status LED: If the red Status LED is not it, the modue passed the tests. Continue with Step 8. If the red Status LED is it, power down the contro unit, re-insta the Maibox Expansion Card if it was instaed in Step 4, then power up the contro unit again. If the red Status LED comes on again, ca for support as indicated on the inside front cover. After the modue passes the sef-diagnostic tests, the extensions associated with the voice messaging system modue go off-hook. Two outside ines show red steady on system phones with those ines for about one minute. When the ines become ide, the voice messaging system is ready to receive cas. 2-6

38 Understanding Programming 3 Contents Communications System Programming Panning Forms Using System Programming The Programming Overays Programming Mode Voice Messaging System Programming Panning Forms Using System Programming The Programming Main Menu Accessing the Programming Main Menu Programming Guideines i

39 Understanding Programming 3 This chapter provides genera programming information for the communications system and the voice messaging system. Both systems must be programmed so they can work together as an integrated unit. Before you begin any programming, you must ensure that a required communications system and voice messaging system panning forms described in this chapter are competed. You wi refer to these forms during programming. Communications System Programming When the communications system is instaed, it uses factory settings that refect the most common usage of the equipment. You can change these settings as required to customize them for the business. You can program the communications system from extension 10. Some systems aso aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information. If your system supports programming from both extensions, you may find it more convenient to program from extension 11. This capabiity aows the receptionist to continue handing cas at extension 10 whie you program. System Programming changes settings for the system as a whoe, or for individua ines or extensions. (Refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information about System Programming options.) On some communications systems, a password may be required to enter System Programming mode. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information. 3-1

40 Understanding Programming Panning Forms Refer to the communications system s System Panner when you are changing system settings, and be sure to record any changes you make. The foowing forms from the System Panner contain information about the voice messaging system: Form A: System Configuration. Contains basic information about the system incuding the ine number and type of voice messaging service required for each ine. Form B1: System Extensions. Contains basic information about each extension. This incudes the type of phone or auxiiary equipment at the extension, and the name of the user or a description of how the extension is used. Form B2: Customized Extension Settings. Contains feature settings, such as Automatic VMS Cover and Automatic Extension Privacy, and group assignments for each extension. Form C: Button Assignments. Specifies which features are programmed on buttons for each extension. This incudes VMS Cover, Do Not Disturb, Voice Maibox Transfer, and Voice Mai Messages buttons. Sampes of these forms and instructions for competing them are incuded in Appendix E. Using System Programming 3-2 System Programming requires a system dispay phone at extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe), with a programming overay paced over the phone s diapad. System Programming procedures are identified by # and a 3-digit code (for exampe, the procedure code for System Date is #101). You can program the system in one of two ways: Direct Method. You access a programming procedure directy by diaing the code for that procedure. This method works best when you are using ony a few procedures during the programming session, and you know the codes. For exampe, press [ # ] [ 1 ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ] to change the system date. Cyce Method. You cyce through a sequence of procedures in numerica order by pressing [ Next Procedure ] or [ Prev Procedure ]. You shoud use this method when programming the communications system for the first time, or when you are changing a series of reated settings. However, procedures #399, #609, and #728 are skipped when you cyce through procedures. NOTE: You can tak on the teephone whie you program. This is usefu if you need to ca for support whie programming. However, you must pace the ca before you enter programming mode, and you must use the handset (not the speakerphone) to tak.

41 Understanding Programming The Programming Overays During System Programming, the norma functions of severa buttons on the phone at extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe) change. For exampe, eft [ Intercom ] becomes [ System Program ], which is the button used to enter programming mode. To identify these buttons whie programming, pace the appropriate programming overay provided with the system over the diapad of the phone at extension 10 or 11. Use the foowing specia buttons whie programming: [ Next Procedure ] and [ Prev Procedure ] cyce forward and backward through the programming procedures. [ Next Item ] and [ Prev Item ] cyce forward and backward through a procedure's parameters. A parameter is typicay an outside ine, an extension, or a teephone ist entry. [ Next Data ] and [ Prev Data ] cyce forward and backward through the vaid ist entries. These buttons work ony for fixed data, such as a ine or extension number. They do not work for variabe data such as date, time, password, teephone numbers, or doorphone assignments. [ Remove ] returns the current setting to the factory setting. [ Enter ] ends an entry of variabe ength, such as a teephone number in an Aowed Phone Number List. [ System Program ] starts the System Programming process. [ Centra Te Program ] starts the Centraized Teephone Programming process (that is, customizing individua teephones from extension 10, or 11 if avaiabe). [ Feature ], when foowed by [ 0 ] [ 0 ], enters or exits programming mode. Programming Mode To enter programming mode: 1. At extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe), make sure the programming overay is in pace over the system phone s diapad. 2. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]. 3. Press [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. 4. Enter the System Password, if required. 5. Enter specific programming procedure codes. 3-3

42 Understanding Programming Voice Messaging System Programming Before you program the voice messaging system, obtain competed copies of panning forms for the communications system and the voice messaging system. These forms provide the names, extensions, maiboxes and other information required to program the voice messaging system. Panning Forms You need the foowing forms for the voice messaging system: Form 1: Language. Shows the Language Mode, Monoingua or Biingua. Aso specifies the System Language for Monoingua Mode or the Primary and Secondary Language for Biingua Mode. Form 2: Maibox Assignments. Shows factory-set maibox assignments with and without the Maibox Expansion Card. Aows you to change maibox assignments, to indicate whether Outcaing capabiity is assigned, and to identify the anguage used for each maibox. Form 3: Menu Definition. Shows transfer options for Automated Attendant Service. Aows you to specify the extension or group number for a seector code transferor announcement number and to provide a description of that extension or group. Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language. Shows the announcement number(s) and the script used to record the associated announcement(s) in the System Language for Monoingua Mode or the Primary Language for Biingua Mode. You can record up to two announcements in Monoingua Mode and in the Primary Language for Biingua Mode. Form 3B: Automated Attendant Announcement Secondary Language. Used ony if the system is set for Biingua Mode. Shows the announcement number(s) and the script used to record the associated announcement(s) in the Secondary Language for Biingua Mode. You can record up to two announcements in Biingua Mode. Form 4: Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language. Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monoingua Mode or the Primary Language for Biingua Mode. Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language. Used ony if the system is set for Biingua Mode. Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. Form 5: Night Menu Prompt: System Language or Primary Language. Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monoingua Mode or the Primary Language for Biingua Mode. 3-4

43 Understanding Programming Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt: Secondary Language. Used ony if the system is set for Biingua Mode. Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. Form 6: Line Ownership. Identifies the ines assigned VMS Line Coverage. Aso shows for each owned ine, the associated teephone number, the name of the subscriber who owns the ine, and the owner s maibox number. Sampes of these forms and instructions for competing them are incuded in Appendix D. Using System Programming A specia ogin number is required to program the voice messaging system. The foowing information appies to this ogin: The ogin number is is not an extension number. This ogin does not have an associated maibox. The anguage associated with this ogin is either the System Language chosen for Monoingua Mode or the Primary Language chosen for Biingua Mode; it cannot be changed. This ogin s factory-set Password is If you are the System Manager, refer to Changing Your Password in Chapter 5 to change the password before you begin to program the system. NOTE: Athough this ogin has a Password, it does not have an associated maibox. To begin programming the voice messaging system, you make a ca to the Voice Mai Service, enter the ogin and password, and seect option 9 (you are not prompted for this option). This takes you to the Programming Main Menu (shown in Figure 3-1). 3-5

44 Understanding Programming The Programming Main Menu The Programming Main Menu aows you to access the Language Mode and the anguage(s) associated with that mode, the Automated Attendant Service Menu, maibox assignments, and ine ownership assignments. Ca Voice Mai Service (Press Intercom ) Enter Login (Press 9 9 # ) Enter Maibox Password (Press #) Seect Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Language (Press [ 1 ]) Automated Attendant (Press [ 3 ]) Maiboxes (Press [ 4 ]) Line Ownership (Press [ 6 ]) Figure 3-1. Programming Menus Accessing the Programming Main Menu To access the Programming Main Menu: Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or a programmed VMMsgs button. The system pays: Wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter extension and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. The system pays: Enter password and #. 3-6

45 Understanding Programming 3. Enter the Password and press #. (The factory-set Password is 1234.) The system pays: System Manager. PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4. The system pays the avaiabe programming options. It does not pay option 9 (the Programming Main Menu), which ony the System Manager can access. 4. Press [ 9 ] to access the Programming Main Menu. The system pays: To program the System Language press 1, for Automated Attendant press 3, for maiboxes press 4, for ine ownership press 6. If finished press * #. Programming Guideines Once you are famiiar with the voice messaging system, use these shortcuts to save time whie programming: You do not have to wait for a prompt to pay before entering digits for the next step. Press [ ] [ # ] to return to the previous menu. Press [ ] [ 4 ] to repeat the current menu options. Press [ ] [ 7 ] at any point during programming to restart at the Programming Main Menu. Use the handset rather than the speakerphone to record prompts and greetings to avoid background noise in your recordings. To ensure that you hear voice prompts, turn off your microphone when programming the system using the speakerphone. Hang Up to exit programming. 3-7

46 Initia Programming 4 Contents Overview Voice Mai System Configurations Upgrading Your Voice Mai System Initia Communications System Setup VMS Hunt Group Extensions Transfer Return Extensions Outgoing Ca Restriction Voice Messaging System Programming Language Monoingua Mode Biingua Mode Automated Attendant Service Monoingua Mode Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements Night Menu Prompt Biingua Mode Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements Night Menu Prompt Voice Mai Service Deeting a Maibox Creating a Maibox Modifying a Maibox s Language Assigning Outcaing Privieges Line Ownership Assigning Line Ownership i

47 Contents Communications System Programming Automated Attendant Service Group Ca Distribution VMS Hunt Deay Automatic Extension Privacy VMS Hunt Schedue Night Service Music On Hod Disaowed Phone Numbers Creating a Disaowed Phone Number List Assigning the Disaowed Phone Number List Aowed Phone Numbers Creating an Aowed Phone Number List Assigning the Aowed Phone Number List Ca Answer Service Line Coverage VMS Line Coverage Line Coverage Extension Automatic VMS Cover VMS Cover Rings Teephone Button Programming VMS Cover Do Not Disturb Voice Maibox Transfer Voice Mai Messages Verifying System Operation Voice Mai Service Automated Attendant Service Day Menu Night Menu Ca Answer Service VMS Extension Coverage VMS Line Coverage Line Coverage Extension ii

48 Initia Programming 4 Overview This chapter identifies the four possibe voice messaging system configurations. It tes you how to perform initia programming of the voice messaging and communications systems. The first two procedures aow you to access and program the voice messaging system you must perform these procedures first for every instaation. The next set of procedures covers voice messaging system programming. The ast section covers how to program the communications system. The order of the procedures in this chapter enabes you to program the Menu Definition and to record the Day and/or Night Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements before the voice messaging system begins to hande cas this order is recommended for voice messaging systems that are being added to existing communications systems. If this is a new instaation, however, you can program the communications system first, then the voice messaging system if you prefer. In addition, you can either foow the step-by-step instructions or use the fowchart at the end of this manua as a quick guide. If you use the step-by-step instructions, note that Step 1 of each procedure for the voice messaging system is ogging in. However, if you are aready ogged in, you can skip Step 1. Finay, some features and procedures in this chapter may not be avaiabe on your communications system. If you are not sure, check the Programming and Use guide for that system. 4-1

49 Initia Programming Voice Mai System Configurations The PARTNER Mai VS supports the foowing configurations: 2 voice channes (ports), 10 maiboxes (standard) 2 ports, 20 maiboxes (requires a Maibox Expansion Card) 4 ports, 20 maiboxes (requires a Maibox Expansion Card) 4 ports, 40 maiboxes (requires a Maibox Expansion Card) Figures 2-1 and 2-2 (in Chapter 2) show the possibe extension numbers for a configurations. Upgrading Your Voice Mai System If you are upgrading your voice mai system with the addition of a Maibox Expansion Card, when you return power to the system the appropriate number of maiboxes is activated. For exampe, if you are upgrading to a 4-port, 20-maibox configuration, the first 20 maiboxes are activated. And previousy existing programming (incuding existing maibox assignment information, persona greetings, and passwords) is saved. You do not need to reprogram the system; however, you shoud: Deete any unused maiboxes and create new ones foowing the procedures in Voice Mai Service, ater in this chapter. NOTE: Numbering of existing maiboxes shoud be detaied on Form 2 for the voice messaging system. You can aso pay existing maibox numbers and receive information on the number of existing maiboxes, as we as the maximum maibox capacity for the current system configuration. At the Programming Main Menu, press [ 4 ] to receive the message indicating how many maiboxes currenty exist and how many are aowed. For more information, see Checking a Maibox s Status, in Chapter 5. For 4-port configurations: Add two extensions to the VMS Hunt Group (Extension Hunt Group 7). These additiona extensions correspond to the midde two extensions. For exampe, if you are upgrading from two to four ports, extensions 18 and 19 woud be added to extensions 20 and 21. You must perform this task to ensure that the system functions propery. See Initia System Setup, earier in this chapter, for specific instructions on how to assign the additiona VMS Hunt Group Extensions. 4-2

50 Initia Programming Initia Communications System Setup You must perform the first two procedures for every instaation. The procedure for Outgoing Ca Restriction is strongy recommended to ensure system security. For the foowing procedures, you need to know the extension numbers associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS system modue. Figures 2-1 and 2-2 (in Chapter 2) show the possibe extension numbers. For the extension numbers appropriate to this instaation, ocate Form B1 of the System Panner for the communications system. VMS Hunt Group Extensions You must use this procedure to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system modue to Hunt Group 7. This Hunt Group, which is caed the VMS Hunt Group, is used excusivey for the voice messaging system. To assign the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1 to Hunt Group 7: 1. At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. 2. Enter the System Password, if required. 3. Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 5 ]. 4. At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ] Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 dispays. If additiona PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are shown on Form B1, repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each one. Continue with Transfer Return Extensions on the next page. * Some systems aso aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-3

51 Initia Programming Transfer Return Extensions For extensions associated with the voice mai system unit, use the foowing procedure. If the voice mai system transfers a ca to an extension that has no Voice Mai coverage, or if Voice Mai coverage is Off, and that extension does not answer, the communications system transfers the ca to the Transfer Return Extension. For extensions that do not have Voice Mai coverage, this procedure ensures that unanswered cas transferred by the voice mai system return to the designated extension, where they wi ring unti they are answered. To assign extension 10 as the transfer return extension for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1: Press [ # ] [ 3 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]*. At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1. At the Data: prompt, press [ 1 ] [ 0 ]. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 dispays. At the Data: prompt, press [ 1 ] [ 0 ]. If additiona PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on Form B1, repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. Continue with the next section for information about programming the voice messaging system. Outgoing Ca Restriction Use this procedure to restrict a extensions associated with the voice mai system unit from making outside cas. Outgoing ca restriction is strongy recommended, in particuar, to protect system security when Outcaing privieges are assigned to subscribers on Form Press [ # ] [ 4 ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ]. At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 2 Inside Ony. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 dispays. Press [ Next Data ] unti the appropriate vaue dispays. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each PARTNER MAIL VS extension. * In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-4

52 Initia Programming Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. Refer to the next section for information about programming the voice messaging system. NOTE: If Outcaing is permitted, be sure to create Aowed and Disaowed Phone Lists as needed for Outcaing numbers. See Disaowed Phone Numbers and Aowed Phone Numbers, ater in this chapter, for instructions. 4-5

53 Initia Programming Voice Messaging System Programming Language Before you begin, ocate Form 1 for the voice messaging system. Check to see if any of the Language settings are changed from the factory defauts: If none of the Language settings is changed, skip to Automated Attendant Service and foow the instructions for Monoingua Mode. If any of the Language settings are changed, foow the appropriate procedure for either Monoingua Mode or Biingua Mode. Monoingua Mode To change the System Language as specified on Form 1: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 1 ] for Language. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. Press [ 6 ] to modify System Language. Enter the number corresponding to the System Language specified on Form 1. Press [ 9 ] to confirm your seection. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with the section, Automated Attendant Service. 4-6

54 Initia Programming Biingua Mode To change the Language Mode and the Primary and Secondary Languages as specified on Form 1: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 1 ] for Language. Press [ 1 ] for Language Mode. Press [ 2 ] for Biingua Mode. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. Press [ 1 ] for Primary Language or [ 2 ] for Secondary Language. Press [ 6 ] to modify the anguage. Enter the number corresponding to the anguage specified on Form 1. Press [ 9 ] to confirm your seection. To modify the other anguage, press [ ] [ # ] and repeat Steps 6 through 9. Otherwise, skip this step. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with the next section, Automated Attendant Service. 4-7

55 Initia Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin, ocate Forms 1, 3, 3A, 4, and 5 for the voice messaging system. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, aso ocate Forms 3B, 4A, and 5A. If Automated Attendant Service is not to be used; skip to Voice Mai Service. Otherwise, to program Automated Attendant Service: If the system is set for Monoingua Mode, use the procedures beow. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, use the procedures ater in this chapter. Monoingua Mode Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements To define the Automated Attendant Service menu as specified on Form 3 and to record the Day Menu Prompt specified on Form 4 and Automated Attendant Announcement(s) specified on Form 3A, foow this procedure. It is important to understand that you must approve each eement (that is, the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as we as save a of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries, your entries wi be ost. This procedure is designed to ensure that caers do not hear the incompete menu whie you are in the process of buiding/modifying it If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. Press [ 1 ] for Day Menu. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompt. Enter a Seector Code for which information is specified in Coumn C of Form 3. If Coumn C is empty, skip to Step 10. Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Seector Code action. Do one of the foowing: Press [ 1 ] for Seector Code Transfer. Press [ 3 ] for Announcement. Press [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-defaut setting). 4-8

56 Initia Programming 8. Do one of the foowing: If you chose Seector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension, Hunt Group, or Caing Group number specified in Coumn C of Form 3. This vaue corresponds to the Seector Code entered in Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step 10. If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement number (1 or 2) specified in Coumn C of Form 3A. This vaue corresponds to the Seector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9. To record an Announcement, ift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Announcement from Form 3A. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Seector Code for which there is information in Coumn C. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition. If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 16. To record a Day Menu Prompt, ift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt or Announcement. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt or Announcement. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 12 to be prompted for re-recording. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve and save the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with Night Menu Prompt or go to the section, Voice Mai Service. 4-9

57 Initia Programming Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt specified on Form 5: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. if you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. b. c. d Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. Press [ 2 ] for Night Menu. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Night Menu Prompt. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 5 to be prompted for re-recording Press [ ] [ # ] to approve the Night Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with the section, Voice Mai Service. 4-10

58 Initia Programming Biingua Mode Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements To define the Automated Attendant Service menu as specified on Form 3 and to record the Day Menu Prompts for the Primary and Secondary Languages specified on Form 4 and 4A, and the Automated Attendant Announcement(s) specified on Form 3B, foow this procedure. It is important to understand that you must approve each eement (that is, the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as we as save a of these entries (in Step 22). If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries, your entries wi be ost. This procedure is designed to ensure that caers do not hear the incompete menu whie you are in the process of buiding/modifying it. Be sure to aow yoursef enough time to compete this procedure in its entirety. 1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ] Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. Press [ 1 ] for Day Menu. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompts. 5. Enter a Seector Code for which information is specified in Coumn C of Form 3. If Coumn C is empty, skip to Step Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Seector Code action. Do one of the foowing: Press [ 1 ] for Seector Code Transfer. Press [ 3 ] for Announcement. Press [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-defaut setting). 8. Do one of the foowing: If you chose Seector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension, Hunt Group, or Caing Group number specified in Coumn C of Form 3. This vaue corresponds to the Seector Code entered in Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement number (1 or 2) specified in Coumn C of Form 3A. This vaue corresponds to the Seector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9. To record an Announcement, ift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Announcement from Form 3A. Press [ 1 ] after recording. 4-11

59 Initia Programming Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Seector Code for which there is information in Coumn C. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition. At this point, do one of the foowing: If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 22. If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language, continue with Step 13. If you want to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language, return to Step 17. If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language, skip to Step 17. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt. Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 13 to be prompted for re-recording. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt. If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language, continue with Step 18; otherwise, skip to Step 21. Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A (or Announcement from Form 3B). Press [ 1 ] after recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt or Announcement. Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt or Announcement. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 18 to be prompted for re-recording. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Press [ # ] to approve and save a entries. The Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements (if any) now take effect. 4-12

60 Initia Programming Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with Night Menu Prompt or go to the section, Voice Mai Service. Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary and Secondary Languages specified on Form 5 and Form 5A: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. Press [ 2 ] for Night Menu. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Night Menu Prompt. At this point, do one of the foowing: If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language, continue with Step 6. To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language, skip to Step 11. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5. Press [ 1 ] after recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 6 to be prompted for re-recording. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt. If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language, continue with Step 11; otherwise, skip to Step 15. Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5A. Press [ 1 ] after recording. 4-13

61 Initia Programming Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 11 to be prompted for re-recording. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt. Press [ # ] to approve a changes. The Night Menu Prompts now take effect. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with the next section, Voice Mai Service. 4-14

62 Initia Programming Voice Mai Service Before you begin, ocate Form 2 for the voice messaging system. Check to see if maiboxes are numbered differenty from the factory defauts, if any maibox is to be deeted, or if a Maibox Language is changed for any maibox. If maiboxes are not numbered differenty, no maibox is deeted, no maibox s anguage is changed, and no Outcaing is assigned, skip to Line Ownership. If any maibox is to be deeted, use the procedure beow. If maiboxes are numbered differenty, first use the procedure beow to deete a maiboxes from extensions that do not require coverage; then use the procedure on the next page to create maiboxes for a extensions that require coverage. If Maibox Language is changed for any maibox, see Modifying a Maibox s Language ater in this section. If Outcaing is chosen, see Assigning Outcaing Privieges ater in this section. Deeting a Maibox NOTE: The receptionist s maibox (at extension 10) cannot be deeted. To deete maiboxes as specified on Form 2: Press [ 4 ] for Maiboxes Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete the maibox. 5. Press [ 9 ] to confirm maibox deetion. 6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each maibox to be deeted. 7. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. 8. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Enter the number of a maibox to be deeted as indicated on Form 2, foowed by [ # ]. Continue with Creating a Maibox or Modifying a Maibox s Language, or go to Assigning Outcaing Privieges or Line Ownership, ater in this chapter. 4-15

63 Initia Programming Creating a Maibox To create maiboxes as specified on Form 2: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 4 ] for Maiboxes. Enter the number of a maibox to be created as indicated on Form 2, foowed by [ # ]. Press [ 4 ] to create this maibox. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each maibox to be created. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with Modifying a Maibox s Language, or go to Assigning Outcaing Privieges or Line Ownership, ater in this chapter. Modifying a Maibox s Language 4-16 To modify a maibox s anguage as specified on Form 2: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 4 ] for Maiboxes. Enter the number of a maibox whose anguage is to change as indicated on Form 2, foowed by [ # ]. Press [ 6 ] for Maibox Language. Press [ 6 ] to modify Maibox Language. Enter the number corresponding to the Maibox Language specified on Form 2. Press [ 9 ] to confirm. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each maibox whose anguage is to be changed. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. Continue with Assigning Outcaing Privieges or Line Ownership, ater in this chapter.

64 Initia Programming Assigning Outcaing Privieges When the system is first instaed, the Outcaing feature is not assigned to any maibox. CAUTION: Before you assign maiboxes Outcaing privieges, you shoud consider the severa system performance and security issues: If the priviege is assigned to a majority of users and their message traffic is heavy, system performance coud be adversey affected. Outcaing attempts coud be deayed. in rare instances, an Outca may not be performed if it is deayed beyond the schedued Outcaing period. Additionay, there are no restrictions on the Outcaing numbers entered by subscribers. Therefore, it is strongy recommended that you imit the number of subscribers who have the Outcaing priviege. And ca restrictions shoud be used for the communications system. See Outgoing Ca Restriction earier in this chapter for detais. To enabe the Outcaing feature for a maibox as specified on Form 2: Press [ 4 ] for Maiboxes Press [ 5 ] for Outcaing Administration. 5. Press [ 9 ] to turn on the Outcaing feature. 6. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Enter the number of a maibox whose Outcaing permission is to change as indicated on Form 2, foowed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each maibox whose Outcaing permission is to be changed. 7. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu. 8. Continue with the next section, Line Ownership. NOTE: Athough you have assigned Outcaing for a specific maibox, the subscriber must specify a teephone or pager number, and turn outcaing on before this feature wi function. Subscribers may aso estabish an Outcaing schedue (optiona). 4-17

65 Initia Programming Line Ownership Before you begin, ocate Form 6 for the voice messaging system. If Form 6 is fied out, use the procedure beow to assign ownership. If Form 6 is not fied out, skip to Communications System Programming. Assigning Line Ownership To assign an owner to an outside ine as specified on Form 6: If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are aready at the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2. a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Maibox Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. Press [ 6 ] for Line Ownership. Press [ 4 ] to assign Line Ownership. Enter a ine number specified in Coumn A of Form 6, foowed by [ # ]. Enter the ine owner s maibox number specified in Coumn D of Form 6, foowed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each owned ine. Hang up to exit voice messaging system programming. Refer to the next section to program the communications system. 4-18

66 Initia Programming Communications System Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin, ocate Forms A, B1, and C of the System Panner for the communications system. Refer to Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage, to see if any ines are checked for VMS AA. If so, use this section to program Automated Attendant Service; otherwise, skip to Ca Answer Service. Group Ca Distribution Use this procedure to specify the outside ines on which Automated Attendant Service is required. To assign VMS-AA ines specified on Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage, to Hunt Group 7: 1. At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. 2. Enter the System Password if required. 3. Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]. 4. At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ] Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 ASSigned. 9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS-AA ine on Form A. 10. At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA ine specified in the Line Coverage coumn of Form A, Page 1. To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. Continue with VMS Hunt Deay beow. * Some systems aso aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some cuntries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-19

67 Initia Programming VMS Hunt Deay Check Form A, Page 2, VMS Hunt Deay. If Deayed is specified, foow the procedure beow. Otherwise, skip to the next section, Automatic Extension Privacy. To change the VMS Hunt Deay setting from Immediate to Deayed as specified on Form A, Page 2: Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]. Automatic Extension Privacy Press [ Next Data ] unti the appropriate vaue dispays. Continue with VMS Hunt Schedue on the next page. If VMS Hunt Deay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from accidentay picking up cas sent to the voice messaging system. To set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1: Press [ # ] [ 3 ] [ 0 ] [ 4 ]. Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 dispays. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. If additiona PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on Form B1, repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one. Continue with VMS Hunt Schedue beow. VMS Hunt Schedue Check Form A, Page 2, VMS Hunt Schedue. If Day Ony or Night Ony is seected, foow the procedure beow. Otherwise, skip to the next section Night Service. To change the VMS Hunt Schedue setting from Aways to Day Ony or Night Ony as specified on Form A, Page 2: 1. Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 7 ]. 2. Press [ Next Data ] unti the appropriate vaue dispays. 3. Continue with Night Service Button beow. 4-20

68 Initia Programming Night Service Check Form C for extension 10. If a Night Service button is specified, foow the procedure beow. To program Night Service on a button with ights at extension 10 as specified on Form C: 1. Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 3 ]. 2. At this point, do one of the foowing: If you want to assign Night Service to the first avaiabe button on the system phone, press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads: Night Service 1 Assigned-Ext10 Go to Step 3. If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button*, press [ 3 ]. The dispay reads: Night Service 3 Seect Button Press the desired programmabe button with ights to assign Night Service to that button. Labe the Night Service button at extension 10. Continue with Music On Hod beow. Music On Hod If desired, program Music On Hod. See the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for instructions. Continue with the next section, Disaowed Phone Numbers. * Seect button (option 3) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-21

69 Initia Programming Disaowed Phone Numbers If Outcaing is permitted, a Disaowed Phone Number List (#404) can be created to restrict cas. Creating a Disaowed Phone Number List Check communications system Panning Form D to see if a Disaowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcaing. If so, continue with the procedures in this section; otherwise, skip to Aowed Phone Numbers. To create a ist of Disaowed Phone Numbers: 1. Press [ # ] [ 4 ] [ 0 ] [ 4 ] At the List Number: prompt, enter the ist number (1-4). At the Entry: prompt, seect a ist entry (01-10). At the Data prompt, enter the first number. To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ]. At this point: To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat Steps 4 and 5. To deete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ]. To enter other numbers in this ist, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4 and 5. Assigning the Disaowed Phone Number List The Disaowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcaing shoud be assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcaing port. To assign a Disaowed Phone Number List to the extensions: 1. Press [ # ] [ 4 ] [ 0 ] [ 5 ] Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. Enter the ist number (1-4). To assign the ist, press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ]. To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and repeat from Step

70 Initia Programming Aowed Phone Numbers If Outcaing is permitted, an Aowed Phone Number List (#407) can be created to identify numbers to which Outcaing is aowed. Creating an Aowed Phone Number List Check communications system Panning Form D to see if an Aowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcaing. If so, continue with the procedures in this section; otherwise, skip to the next section. NOTE: If the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions were restricted to Inside Ony using Outgoing Ca Restriction (#401), Outcaing wi not work uness an Aowed Phone Number List is created and assigned. Outcas can be made ony to the numbers incuded in the ist. To create a ist of Aowed Phone Numbers: 1. Press [ # ] [ 4 ] [ 0 ] [ 7 ]. 2. At the List Number: prompt, enter the ist number (1-4) At the Entry: prompt, seect a ist entry (01-10). At the Data prompt, enter the first number. To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ]. At this point: To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat Steps 4 and 5. To deete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ]. To enter other numbers in this ist, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4 and 5. Assigning the Aowed Phone Number List The Aowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcaing shoud be assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcaing port. To assign the Aowed Phone Number List to the extensions: 1. Press [ # ] [ 4 ] [ 0 ] [ 8 ]. 2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the ist number (1-4). To assign the ist, press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ]. To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and repeat from Step 2. Continue with the next section, Ca Answer Service. 4-23

71 Initia Programming Ca Answer Service Before you begin, ocate Forms A and B2 of the System Panner for the communications system. Refer to Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage. If either check marks or extension numbers appear in the VMS-Mai coumn, use Line Coverage on the next page to program persona ines for Ca Answer Service. If nothing is specified in the VMS-Mai coumn of Form A, refer to Form B2 to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions. If it is, refer to Automatic VMS Cover and VMS Cover Rings ater in this chapter. If neither VMS-Mai for persona ines or Automatic VMS Cover is specified, skip to Teephone Button Programming. Line Coverage Refer to Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage, VMS-Mai: If check marks appear for any ines in this coumn, use the procedure in VMS Line Coverage beow. If extension numbers are specified for any ines in this coumn, use the procedure in Line Coverage Extension beow. VMS Line Coverage To assign VMS-Mai ines checked on Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage, to Hunt Group 7: 1. Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]* At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ]. At the Line: prompt, enter the first ine checked in the VMS-Mai coumn. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 3 VMS Line Cover. To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 3 VMS Line Cover. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each VMS-Mai ine checked on Form A. If extension numbers are specified for any ines in this coumn, use the foowing procedure in Line Coverage Extension. Otherwise, continue with the section, Automatic VMS Cover. * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-24

72 Initia Programming Line Coverage Extension To assign ine coverage for the extension numbers specified in the VMS-Mai coumn on Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage: Automatic VMS Cover Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 8 ]*. At the Line: prompt, enter the first ine for which an extension is specified in the VMS-Mai coumn of Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS-Mai coumn. To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS-Mai coumn. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each VMS-Mai ine for which an extension number is written on Form A. Continue with the next section, Automatic VMS Cover. Check Form B2 to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions. If it is, foow the procedure beow. If not, skip to VMS Cover Rings. To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension to Assigned as indicated on Form B2: Press [ # ] [ 3 ] [ 1 ] [ 0 ]. Enter the number of the first extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is to be assigned. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the extension number shows on the dispay. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is to be assigned. Continue with VMS Cover Rings beow. * Extension Line Coverage (#208) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-25

73 Initia Programming VMS Cover Rings Check Form A, Page 2, to see if VMS Cover Rings (#117)* is different from the factory setting of 3. If it is, foow the procedure beow beginning with Step 1. If not, skip to Step 3 of the procedure beow. To change the number of times cas ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system as indicated on Form A, Page 2, VMS Cover Rings: 1. Press [ # ] [ 1 ] [ 1 ] [ 7 ]. 2. Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting specified on Form A. 3. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. 4. Continue with the next section, Teephone Button Programming. Teephone Button Programming Before you begin, ocate Form C of the System Panner for the communications system. Be sure you have a version of the form for each subscriber s phone. Use this section to program buttons on subscribers phones, incuding the receptionist s phone. This section uses Centraized Teephone Programming. When you are finished programming, be sure to abe a buttons on subscribers phones. VMS Cover This button aows the subscriber to turn voice mai coverage on and off. To program a VMS Cover button as specified on Form C: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. Press a programmabe button with ights. Press [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. At this point, do one of the foowing: Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension. Press [ Centra Te Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit. * VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some countries, the feature code for Voice Maibox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-26

74 Initia Programming Do Not Disturb Used in conjunction with either automatic VMS cover or manua VMS cover, this button ets subscribers send caers immediatey to his or her maibox (instead of ringing the extension first). To program a Do Not Disturb (DND) button as specified on Form C: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. 2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmabe button with ights. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ]. At this point, do one of the foowing: Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension. Press [ Centra Te Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit. Voice Maibox Transfer This button ets any system user transfer cas directy to a subscriber s maibox, without ringing the extension first. To program a Voice Maibox Transfer (VMBox) button as specified on Form C: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ] Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. Press a programmabe button. Press [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 4 ]*. At this point, do one of the foowing: Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension. Press [ Centra Te Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit. * In some countries, the feature code for Voice Maibox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-27

75 Initia Programming Voice Mai Messages This intercom Auto Dia button aows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with the touch of one button. To program a Voice Mai Messages (VMMsgs) button as specified on Form C: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ] Dia the number of the extension to be programmed. Press a programmabe button. Press eft [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]. At this point, do one of the foowing: Press [ Centra Te Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit. 4-28

76 Initia Programming Verifying System Operation After you finish programming the voice messaging system and the communications system, you shoud perform the tests described in this section to verify system operation. If your system aows programming from extension 11*, you shoud perform these tests from extension 11 to keep extension 10 free for the receptionist to hande cas. Voice Mai Service Make a ca to the VMS Hunt Group by pressing [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. You shoud hear the Voice Mai Service greeting: Wecome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Pease enter extension and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4. Automated Attendant Service If the VMS Hunt Schedue is set for Day Ony or Aways, foow the procedure for Day Menu. If the VMS Hunt Schedue is set for Night Ony, foow the procedure for Night Menu. Day Menu Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is off. Ca in on a ine answered by the Automated Attendant Service. If the system is set for: Immediate, Automated Attendant Service shoud answer the ca on the second ring. Deayed, Automated Attendant Service shoud answer the ca after the fourth ring. Listen for the Day Menu Prompt. After the prompt, choose an option from the day menu. Make sure your ca is transferred to the appropriate extension or group, or the correct Announcement is payed. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the day menu. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, press [ ] [ 1 ] to check the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You shoud aso hear any recorded Announcement. * Some systems aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-29

77 Initia Programming Night Menu 9. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each ine that has Automated Attendant Service coverage. 10. If the VMS Hunt Schedue is set for Aways, continue with Night Menu beow Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is on. Ca in on a ine answered by the Automated Attendant Service. If the system is set for: Immediate, Automated Attendant Service shoud answer the ca on the second ring. Deayed, Automated Attendant Service shoud answer the ca after the fourth ring. Listen for the Night Menu Prompt. If you aready tested the Day Menu, go to Step 8. Otherwise, after the prompt, choose an option from the night menu. Make sure your ca is transferred to the appropriate extension or group, or the correct announcement is payed. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the night menu. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, press [ ] [ 1 ] to check the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You shoud aso hear any recorded Announcement. 4-30

78 Initia Programming Ca Answer Service VMS Extension Coverage Press the Do Not Disturb button at the appropriate destination extensions to quicky route your test cas to Ca Answer Service. For extensions that do not have Automatic VMS Cover, turn on coverage by pressing the VMS Cover button at those extensions. Ca the first extension that has VMS coverage (either automatic or manua). If Do Not Disturb is on at the extension, Ca Answer Service shoud answer the ca after one ring and you shoud hear the defaut greeting for that maibox. (If Do Not Disturb is not on, the ca rings at the extension before Ca Answer Service answers it.) Repeat this procedure for every extension that has voice mai coverage. VMS Line Coverage Ca in on the first ine that is programmed for VMS Line Cover. Ca Answer Service shoud answer the ca on the fifth ring and the factory-set greeting shoud prompt you to eave a message in that ine owner s maibox. Repeat this procedure for every ine that has VMS Line Cover. Line Coverage Extension Make sure VMS Cover is on at the owner s extension. Ca in and make sure the ca goes to VMS Cover by the number of rings specified by VMS Cover Rings (#117)*. Verify that you hear the factory-set maibox greeting for the ine owner. Repeat this procedure for every Line Coverage extension. * VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 4-31

79 System Management 5 Contents Genera Information Changing Your Password Training Co-Workers Language Outcaing Using the Tutor Feature Receptionist s Responsibiities Group Caing Tips Language Modifying the Language Mode Monoingua Mode Paying the System Language Modifying the System Language Biingua Mode Paying the Primary Language Modifying the Primary Language Paying the Secondary Language Modifying the Secondary Language Automated Attendant Service Menu Definition, Prompt, and Announcements Other Options Monoingua Mode Paying the Menu Definition and Announcements Paying the Day or Night Menu Prompt Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements Modifying the Night Menu Prompt i

80 Contents Biingua Mode Paying the Menu Definition and Announcements Paying the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and Secondary Languages Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements Modifying the Night Menu Prompts Group Ca Distribution VMS Hunt Deay Automatic Extension Privacy VMS Hunt Schedue Modifying Maiboxes Hardware Considerations Guest Maiboxes Checking a Maibox s Status Deeting a Maibox Creating a Maibox Reinitiaizing a Password Reinitiaizing a Maibox Paying a Maibox s Language Modifying a Maibox s Language Administering Outcaing for a Maibox Automatic VMS Cover VMS Cover Rings Line Coverage VMS Line Coverage Scanning Line Ownership Assigning Line Ownership Modifying Line Ownership Deeting Line Ownership Group Ca Distribution Extension Line Coverage Teephone Button Programming VMS Cover Do Not Disturb Voice Maibox Transfer Voice Mai Messages ii

81 System Management 5 This chapter provides the programming procedures you can use to make changes to the voice messaging system to refect changes in your company. Most changes you make wi occur because of personne changes. The foowing ist identifies areas of system programming that you are ikey to change as you manage the system on an on-going basis: Language. Aows you to change the Language Mode (Monoingua or Biingua) and the anguage(s) supported by that mode. Automated Attendant Service. Aows you to change the prompt that outside caers hear when the Automated Attendant answers cas and to redefine menu options for transferring outside caers to specific destinations and for changing announcements that caers can choose to hear. Aso aows you to specify new ines for Automated Attendant Service coverage, if you add new ines to your system. Maibox Assignments. Aows you to deete and create maiboxes, reset maiboxes and subscriber s passwords to factory settings, assign/ cance Outcaing privieges for a subscriber s maibox, and change the anguage a subscriber hears when using Voice Mai Service. Line Coverage. Aows you to modify ine coverage using either VMS Line Coverage or Extension Line Coverage. Teephone Button Programming. Aows you to program buttons on subscriber s system phones for convenient use of voice messaging system features. If you are a new System Manager, you shoud review the foowing section for genera information that you need to know in your new roe. You shoud use the rest of this chapter on an as-needed basis. Aso, if you have not done so aready, you shoud read Chapter 1 for a description of the voice messaging system s features and services and Chapter 3 for an overview of voice messaging system and communications system programming. 5-1

82 System Management Genera Information This section tes you how to change the System Manager s password, which is required for changing voice messaging system settings. It aso provides information that you shoud share with a system users and other information that is specificay for the receptionist at extension 10. Changing Your Password The factory setting for Iogin 99 s (the System Manager s) Password is To prevent unauthorized programming of the system, you shoud change the defaut password immediatey after instaation or any time the password has been reset. You can assign up to four digits for a Password. It is recommended that you create a Password from random, non-sequentia digits. If you change the Password and forget it, you must contact the BCS Technica Service Center at or ca your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer for instructions on how to reset the Password. To change the Password for ogin 99: Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. Enter the existing password (for exampe, 1234) and press [ # ]. Press [ 5 ] to change the password. The prompt asks you to enter your new password. Enter up to four digits for the new password and press [ # ]. The prompt asks you to re-enter your new password. Enter your new password again foowed by [ # ]. The new password is now active. Hang up to quit. 5-2

83 System Management Training Co-Workers Language Outcaing You shoud et system users know about the foowing anguage options: You can change the anguage of voice prompts that a subscriber hears when recording a persona greeting, retrieving messages, and other Voice Mai services. This anguage can be different from the System Language set for Monoingua Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages set for Biingua Mode. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, subscribers can record two persona greetings: one in the Primary Language and a second in the Secondary Language. They shoud incude a sentence eary in the greetings that ets caers know that they can switch to the other anguage by pressing [ ] [ 1 ] whie the greeting is paying. You shoud et system users know that they can turn this feature on or off, retrieve their messages from a touch-tone phone, as we as enter and change their Outcaing number and schedue. Instructions for performing these tasks are provided in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System. In addition, you shoud provide users with the foowing information about the Outcaing feature: Athough you are responsibe for assigning Outcaing privieges to a subscriber s maibox, the subscriber must turn on Outcaing and specify an Outcaing number. Otherwise, the system does not notify subscribers when new messages have arrived in their maiboxes. If the subscriber is ogged into the system, the system does not pace an outca. If the subscriber disconnects from the system without istening to a new message, the outca is paced according to schedue. The Outcaing number may contain up to 60 digits, incuding the * and # symbos. (The * represents a 1.5-second pause.) The 9 diaed to get an outside ine must be incuded in the Outcaing number. And a pause (*) shoud be incuded after the 9. Subscribers may aso specify a schedue (that is, a start time and end time) for Outcaing. For exampe, they may direct the system to outca ony during the hours of 7:30 p.m. to 8:00 a.m. Otherwise, the defaut schedue is 24 hours. The start and end times entered by a user are based on a 24-hour cock; however, the voice payback of these times is based on the system anguage seection of 12 or 24-hour format. In the exampe above, the subscriber woud enter the start time of 7:30 p.m. as 1930# and 8:00 a.m. as 0800#. 5-3

84 System Management If a message arrives at a subscriber s maibox after the specified Outcaing time interva, Outcaing notification for that message is not initiated at the next Outcaing time interva. The system attempts to outca three times within a minimum time interva of 15 minutes between attempts. However, during heavy message traffic periods the time interva may be onger. For a pager/beeper number: Subscribers can program a caback number as part of the Outcaing number. Subscribers are advised to enter severa pauses (where each pause is represented by a * sign) after the Outcaing number (before entering their PIN and/or caback number) to aow the paging system sufficient time to answer. Subscribers shoud experiment to determine the correct number of pauses needed after the pager service number. It is important to ensure that enough time is aowed for the ca to be diaed and answered before additiona information (such as the PIN or caback number) is diaed. It is strongy recommended that subscribers verify that the system can function propery with the Outcaing number as it is entered. Subscribers shoud eave a message in their own maibox during a schedued Outcaing period to ensure that the system paces the ca to their beeper. For a teephone number: After the system has sent a the digits of the Outcaing number, the system pays a message that announces the subscriber s maibox number and notification that a new message has arrived. It aso instructs the subscriber how to access the new message and how to cance the Outcaing notification. This message is repeated five times uness it is interrupted by the subscriber. The subscriber may make up to three attempts to og in during the outca before the system disconnects. A subscriber can cance Outcaing for a new message without ogging in or istening to the new message by pressing [ ] [ # ] when istening to the Outcaing notification message. 5-4

85 System Management Using the Tutor Feature Tutor is an on-ine hep feature that aows a system users (not just voice messaging system subscribers) to easiy access and isten to information on commony-used communications system features. You shoud et system users know about this feature and recommend that users stick the Tutor Service abe (provided with the voice messaging system hardware) into the depression for the handset mouthpiece on the base of their system phone. To access the Tutor menu, users simpy ca the voice messaging system by diaing [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] and enter [ ] [ 4 ] after they hear the Pease enter extension prompt. Voice prompts request the user to enter topic and subtopic numbers. The avaiabe topics are: 1 Autodia Features 1 Last Number Redia 2 Save Number Redia 3 Persona Speed Dia 4 Intercom Auto Dia 5 Outside Auto Dia 2 Interna Cas 1 Hands Free Answer on Intercom 2 Voice Interrupt On Busy 3 Fixed Features 1 Transfer 2 Conference 4 About Your Phone 1 Buttons and Lights 2 Dispay 3 Speakerphone 4 Voume 5 Ring Patterns 3 Group Paging Information about each subtopic is presented in short, easy to understand segments. After a segment pays, the user hears one beep or two beeps: One beep means that there is more information about the subtopic. The user can press [ ] [ 4 ] to repay the previous segment or [ # ] to pay the next segment. Two beeps indicate the end of the information about the subtopic. The user can press [ ] [ 4 ] to repay the previous segment or [ # ] to return to the Tutor Main Menu. NOTE: Tutor s prompts pay in either the System Language seected for Monoingua Mode or the Primary Language seected for Biingua Mode. This cannot be changed. 5-5

86 System Management Receptionist s Responsibiities After the voice messaging system is instaed, the receptionist at extension 10 shoud be aware of certain interactions between the voice messaging system and the receptionist s extension. Use the foowing ist as a guide when you expain these interactions to the receptionist: The receptionist s extension is factory set as extension 10 and cannot be changed. The maibox for this extension can hande up to 60 minutes of stored messages (or 120 messages). When the Automated Attendant Service answers outside cas, the receptionist wi receive cas from any caer who presses [ 0 ] or stays on the ine after hearing the menu prompt. VMS shows on the dispay of the receptionist s phone to identify cas transferred by the voice messaging system. The persona greeting recorded at the receptionist s maibox shoud be more genera than persona, since this maibox is the destination for business cas when the receptionist is not avaiabe. If the receptionist requests a persona maibox, you can create a guest maibox for that purpose. See Guest Maiboxes ater in this chapter for instructions. Once the guest maibox is created, the receptionist shoud te peope who might ca to dia the extension number of the guest maibox to eave persona messages when they ca and hear the Automated Attendant Service prompt. Additionay, the receptionist can record a note on the persona greeting at extension 10 to notify caers of the guest maibox. For exampe, the persona greeting for extension 10 can aso say If you woud ike to eave a persona message for Ms. Smith, dia [ ] [ 8 ] [ 3 ] [ 3 ]. In this exampe, 33 represents the 2-digit extension number of the guest maibox. Remind the receptionist to og in to the guest maibox reguary to check for messages, since the guest maibox does not have an associated phone with a message waiting ight. If Automatic VMS Cover is not assigned to extension 10, you shoud program a VMS Cover button and a Do Not Disturb button on the system phone at extension 10. Then instruct the receptionist to press both the VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb buttons (to turn the features on) whenever the receptionist eaves the desk or eaves for the day. This ensures that any cas routed to extension 10 when the receptionist is away are immediatey covered by the voice messaging system. If the receptionist has Automatic VMS Cover, program ony the Do Not Disturb button at the extension. If seector code 9 on the Automated Attendant Service menu is eft at the factory setting (which is highy recommended), caers can be routed directy to the receptionist s maibox to eave a message. If this is the case, et the receptionist know that he or she shoud review the messages each morning and distribute them to the appropriate peope. 5-6

87 System Management Group Caing Tips It is important to note that voice mai coverage is not provided for group cas. If your system is set up for group transfer, be sure that the receptionist is aware of the foowing items: If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a ca to a Hunt Group or Caing Group*, and a members in the group are busy (members are either on the phone or have Do Not Disturb on), the ca is transferred to the receptionist s extension. When caers transfer to a busy group, they hear Music On Hod, tones, ringing, or sience (depending on how the communications system is set up) unti the receptionist answers. If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a ca to a Caing Group and the ca is not answered, the ca is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings. The ca wi not be sent to the voice maibox. If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a ca to a Hunt Group that has ony one avaiabe member and that member does not answer the ca, the ca is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings. The ca wi not be sent to the voice maibox. * Caing Groups are not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-7

88 System Management Language You can choose the Language Mode, either Monoingua or Biingua, and the Language(s) used by that mode (see Figure 5-1). Monoingua Mode supports a singe System Language that caers hear when they ca in to the voice messaging system. Biingua Mode supports two anguages, a Primary Language and a Secondary Language. Caers who ca in to a voice messaging system set for Biingua Mode, hear the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt, announcements, and maibox greetings in the Primary Language, but have the option of switching to the Secondary Language by pressing [ ] [ 1 ]. Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Language (Press [ 1 ]) Language Mode (Press [ 1 ]) System Language (Press [ 2 ]) Monoingua Mode (Press [ 1 ]) Biingua Mode (Press [ 2 ]) No Biingua Mode? Yes Pay System Language (Press [ 2 ]) Modify System Language (Press [ 6 ]) Pay Primary Language (Press[ 1 ][ 2 ]) Modify Primary Language (Press[ 1 ][ 6 ]) Pay Secondary Language (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ]) Modify Secondary Language (Press[ 2 ][ 6 ]) Figure 5-1. Language Menu 5-8

89 System Management If you need to change current programming for Language, you can use the instructions presented in this section. For exampe: If you want to change the Language Mode from Monoingua to Biingua or Biingua to Monoingua, use Modifying the Language Mode. If you want to change the current System Language used in Monoingua Mode, use Modifying the System Language. If you want to change the current Primary and/or Secondary Language used in Biingua Mode, use Modifying the Primary Language and/or Modifying the Secondary Language. Modifying the Language Mode Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in Language Mode. When you change the Language Mode, the system continues to use any recorded messages associated with the seected anguage. For exampe, if you change from Monoingua to Biingua Mode and the System Language in Monoingua Mode was Latin American Spanish caers wi hear Latin American Spanish as the Primary Language. Aso, when you change the mode, isten to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are sti reevant, and re-record them if necessary. To change the Language Mode: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Language, press 2. Press [ 1 ] for Language Mode. Mode, press 1. To program System If finished, press * #. The system pays the current Language Mode then: For Monoingua Mode, press 1. For Biingua Mode, press 2. If finished, press * #. 5-9

90 System Management Either: Press [ 1 ] for Monoingua Mode. The system pays: System is in Monoingua Mode. To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for Biingua Mode. The system pays: System is in Biingua Mode. To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. At this point, do one of the foowing: To change the System Language if the system is set for Monoingua Mode, go to Step 3 of Modifying the System Language. To change the Primary Language if the system is set for Biingua Mode, go to Step 3 of Modifying the Primary Language. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Monoingua Mode Paying the System Language To isten to the current System Language: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the progrmmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To pay System Language, press 2. To modify System Language, press 6. If finished press * #. 5-10

91 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: System anguage is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage). To pay System Language, press 2. To modify System Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. At this point, do one of the foowing: To change the System Language, go to Step 4 of Modifying the System Language. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Modifying the System Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the System Language seected for Monoingua Mode. When you change the System Language, the system uses any recorded messages aready associated with the new System Language. After changing the System Language, isten to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are sti reevant, and re-record them if necessary. NOTE: When you change the System Language, the Maibox Language for any maiboxes that were eft at the factory setting aso change to refect the new System Language. Any maiboxes that were assigned a different anguage do not change. To change the System Language: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To pay System Language, press 2. To modify System Language, press 6. If finished press * #. 5-11

92 System Management Press [ 6 ]. The system pays the current System Language, then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired anguage. Press the number for the anguage you want to use. The system pays: For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage), press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. Either: Press [ 6 ] to cance your seection. The system pays: System Language has not been changed. Press [ 9 ] to confirm your seection. The system pays: System Language has been changed. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-12

93 System Management Biingua Mode Paying the Primary Language To isten to the current Primary Language: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To program Primary Language, press 1. To program Secondary Language, press 2. If finished press * #. Press [ 1 ] for Primary Language. The system pays: To pay Primary Language, press Language, press 6. If finished Press [ 2 ] to pay the Primary Language. The system pays: 2. To modify Primary press * #. Primary Language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage). To pay Primary Language, press 2. To modify Primary Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. At this point, do one of the foowing: To change the Primary Language, go to Step 5 of Modifying the Primary Language. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-13

94 System Management Modifying the Primary Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the Primary Language seected for Biingua Mode. When you change the Primary Language, the system uses any recorded messages aready associated with the new Primary Language. After changing the Primary Language, isten to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are sti reevant; re-record them if necessary. NOTE: When you change the Primary Language, the Maibox Language for any maiboxes that were eft at the factory setting aso change to refect the new Primary Language. Any maiboxes that were assigned a different anguage do not change. To change the Primary Language: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To program Primary Language, press 1. To program Secondary Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 1 ] for Primary Language. The system pays: To pay Primary Language, press 2. To modify Primary Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays the current Primary Language, then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired anguage. 5-14

95 System Management Press the number for the anguage you want to use. The system pays: For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage), press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. Either: Press [ 6 ] to cance your seection. The system pays: Primary Language has not been changed. Press [ 9 ] to confirm your seection. The system pays: Primary Language has been changed. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Paying the Secondary Language To isten to the current Secondary Language: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. 3. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To program Primary Language, press 1. To program Secondary Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. 4. Press [ 2 ] for Secondary Language. The system pays: To pay Secondary Language, press 2. To modify Secondary Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-15

96 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: Secondary anguage is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage). To pay Secondary Language, press 2. To modify Secondary Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. At this point, do one of the foowing: To change the Secondary Language, go to Step 5 of Modifying the Secondary Language. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Modifying the Secondary Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the Secondary Language seected for Biingua Mode. When you change the Secondary Language, the system uses any recorded messages aready associated with the new Secondary Language. After changing the Secondary Language, isten to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are sti reevant; re-record them if necessary. To change the Secondary Language: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. b. c. d. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 1 ] for Language. The system pays: To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for System Language. The system pays: To program Primary Language, press 1. To program Secondary Language, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] for Secondary Language. The system pays: To pay Secondary Language, press 2. To modify Secondary Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-16

97 System Management Press [ 6 ]. The system pays the current Secondary Language, then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired anguage. Press the number for the anguage you want to use. The system pays: For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage), press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. Either: Press [ 6 ] to cance your seection. The system pays: Secondary Language has not been changed. Press [ 9 ] to confirm your seection. The system pays: Secondary Language has been changed. 8. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-17

98 System Management Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant Service (see Figure 5-2) can provide both day and night operation so caers can hear an appropriate prompt in either the System or Primary Language when they ca your company. The voice messaging system switches to day or night operation depending on the setting of the Night Service button at extension 10 the receptionist s extension. You can customize the day and/or night menu to wecome the caer and offer the caer a ist of options for transferring to a system extension or group, or for hearing an Announcement that you record. These Announcements can te caers about your business hours and ocation, emergency cover information, and seasona or specia offers. You can record up to two Announcements (of up to four minutes each). If the system is set for Biingua Mode, you can record up to two Announcements in each anguage. Be sure to record the Day and Night Menu Prompts in both the Primary and Secondary Languages as we. Then caers can press [ ] [ 1 ] to switch between the anguages. 5-18

99 System Management Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Automated Attendant (Press 3 ) Day Menu (Press [ 1 ]) Night Menu (Press [ 2 ]) Yes Biingua Mode? No Yes Biingua Mode? No Pay Day Modify Menu Prompt Definition and/or (Press [ 2 ][ 1 ]) Day Prompt (Press [ 6 ]) Pay Night Prompt (Press [ 2 ][ 1 ]) Modify Night Prompt (Press [ 6 ]) Pay Menu Definition and Pay Primary Modify Primary Announcement Night Prompt Night Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ]) (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ]) (Press[ 6 ][ 1 ]) Pay Primary Day Prompt (Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ]) Modify Menu Definition and/or Primary Day Prompt Pay Secondary Night Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ]) Modify Secondary Night Prompt (Press[ 6 ][ 2 ]) (Press [ 6 ]) Pay Secondary Day Prompt (Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ]) Pay Menu Definition and Announcement (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ]) Pay Primary Pay Secondary Announcement Announcement (Press [ 1 ]) (Press [ 2 ]) Figure 5-2 Automated Attendant Service Menu 5-19

100 System Management If you need to change current programming for the Automated Attendant Service, you can use the instructions presented in this section. For exampe: If you want to change the transfer options avaiabe for outside caers, use Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements and Modifying the Night Menu Prompt for either Monoingua Mode or Biingua Mode to update the options, prompts, and/or Announcements caers hear. If you add a ine to the system that requires Automated Attendant Service, use Group Ca Distribution to incude the new ine. If you want to change the way Automated Attendant Service handes cas, use VMS Hunt Deay and/or VMS Hunt Schedue. Menu Definition, Prompt, and Announcements When the Automated Attendant Service answers a ca, the caer hears a menu prompt that requests the caer to press one or more buttons on the diapad to transfer to a specific extension or group of extensions, or to hear an Announcement. After the caer presses the button(s), the system transfers the ca to the appropriate extension or group, and the caer hears Music On Hod, tones, ringing, or sience, or an Announcement (depending on how the communications system is set up). Menu Definition ets you specify the extensions or groups to which outside caers are transferred or the Announcements that caers hear. The voice messaging system uses the Menu Definition for both day and night operation. To set up the menu, you define digits 1 through 9, caed Seector Codes, for the foowing types of ca transfer: Direct Extension Transfer. This is the factory setting for seector codes 1 through 8. If you use the factory setting, caers can enter an extension number directy from the menu. For direct extension transfer, the seector code represents a range of extensions. For exampe, seector code 1 aows outside caers to transfer directy to any extension that begins with a 1 extensions For seector code 2, outside caers can transfer directy to any extension that begins with a 2 extensions 20 29, and so on. Seector code 9 is different from seector codes 1 through 8. If you eave seector code 9 at the factory setting, outside caers are transferred directy to the receptionist s maibox where they can eave a message. This is especiay usefu for night operation. If you use it, caers are routed directy to the receptionist s maibox the system does not ring the extension first. Seector Code Transfer. You can assign any of the seector codes to one specific extension or group. Then when a caer presses the singedigit seector code, the system transfers the ca to the specific extension or Caing Group or Hunt Group that you assigned to that digit. 5-20

101 System Management Announcement. You can assign any of the seector codes to an Announcement number. When a caer presses the singe-digit seector code, the system pays an Announcement (primary or secondary) that you assigned to that digit. Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in ength. You can set the system to pay the Announcement and hang up or prompt the caer to press [ ] [ 8 ] and an extension number. NOTE: Voice mai coverage is not provided for group cas. See Group Caing Tips, earier in this chapter, for more information. Depending on your business, you can define the menu so that some options accommodate caers during norma business hours and other options accommodate after-hours caers. For exampe: the ANY Trave Agency wants to give outside caers the abiity to transfer directy to any empoyee in their system by diaing the empoyee s 2-digit extension number. The company has empoyees assigned at extensions 10 through 25. Therefore, the company eaves Seector Codes 1 and 2 at the factory setting (Direct Extension Transfer). This eaves Seector Codes 3 through 9 avaiabe for Seector Code Transfer. In this case, ANY Trave Agency assigns Seector Code 3 to extension 21 and Seector Codes 4 and 5 to Hunt Groups 1 and 2, respectivey. A sampe Day Menu Prompt for the ANY Trave Agency foows: Thank you for caing the ANY Trave Agency. If you know the extension of the person you are caing, enter the extension number now. To speak with a cruise speciaist, press 3. For corporate trave, press 4. For persona trave, press 5. For assistance, press 0 or, if you have a rotary phone, stay on the ine. A sampe night menu prompt for the ANY Trave Agency foows: You have reached the ANY Trave Agency. Our business hours are 9 to 5, Monday through Friday. To eave a message, press 9 and we wi return your ca as soon as possibe. If this is an emergency, press 6 for our specia traveer s assistance information. In this case, the caer who needs after-hours assistance can press [ 6 ] to hear the foowing Announcement: If you have mispaced your airine tickets or passport, missed your fight or imousine pickup, or have any other trave emergency after ANY Trave s standard business hours, ca to speak with our specia traveer s assistance program representative. 5-21

102 System Management Other Options Automated Attendant Service provides the foowing buit-in options no programming required for use in your menu prompt: Monoingua Mode A third type of transfer option, which is aways avaiabe to outside and inside caers, may be usefu in certain situations. With this type of transfer, when caers press [ ] [ 8 ], the system prompts them to enter an extension number. Using the exampe above, if you assigned Seector Code Transfer to Seector Codes 1 and 2 (rather than starting the assignment from 3), you coud request caers to press [ ] [ 8 ], to aow them to transfer to extensions 10 to 25. As shown in the sampe Day Menu Prompt, you can aso instruct a caer to stay on the ine for assistance. If so, the voice messaging system automaticay transfers the ca to the receptionist s extension. This option is especiay important for caers who have rotary phones. As shown in the sampe Day Menu Prompt, caers can press [ 0 ] at any time to transfer automaticay to the receptionist s extension for assistance. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, caers can press [ ] [ 1 ] to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages. In this case, you must record two messages for the Day and Night Menu Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements: one each in the Primary and Secondary Languages. Paying the Menu Definition and Announcements This procedure ets you isten to the current Menu Definition and any Announcement associated with a Seector Code. The Menu Definition is accessed through the Day Menu. To pay the current menu definition: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. press 2. For the Night Menu, 5-22

103 System Management Press [ 1 ] for the Day Menu. The system pays: To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu prompt, press 1. To pay the Menu Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] to pay the Menu Definition. The system pays the current Menu Definition. f an Announcement is recorded, the system pays the Seector Code number and associated Announcement number. Press [ 1 ] to pay or [ # ] to skip the recorded Announcement assigned to the Seector Code. The system pays the recorded Announcement and goes to the next Seector Code. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Paying the Day or Night Menu Prompt To isten to the current Day or Night Menu Prompt: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. press 2. If finished, press * #. 3. Either: Press [ 1 ] for the Day Menu. Press [ 2 ] for the Night Menu. The system pays: For the Night Menu, TO pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-23

104 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu prompt, press 1. To pay the Menu Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #. To pay the Menu Prompt, press [ 1 ]. The system pays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your choice in Step 3. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements Update Forms 3 and 4 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompt; update Forms 3 and 3A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Announcements, if any. Then use the updated forms whie performing the foowing procedure. CAUTION: It is important to understand that you must approve each eement (that is, the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as we as save a of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries, your entries wi be ost. This procedure is designed to ensure that caers do not hear the incompete menu whie you are in the process of modifying it. To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and/or Announcements: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 1 ]. The system pays: For the Night Menu, To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-24

105 System Management Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: Pease enter a seector code from 1 to 9. When finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #. f you want to modify ony the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 10. Otherwise, continue with Step 6. Enter a Seector Code from 1 through 9. The system pays the current Seector Code Action (or Announcement Number and Announcement), then asks: Do you want to make a modification? or 6 to cance. 13. Press [ 1 ] when you are finished recording. Press 9 to confirm Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Seector Code. The system pays: For seector code transfer, press 1; for announcement, press 3; for direct extension transfer, press 5. At this point, do one of the foowing: If you want to return the Seector Code to the factory setting (direct extension transfer for Seector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to receptionist s maibox for Seector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Seector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10. If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Seector Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number, foowed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Seector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10. If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9. Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11. The system pays: To record a new announcement, press 1; to use existing announcement, press #. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition. The system pays: To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1. To use the existing prompt and save any Menu Definition changes, press #. If you do not want to record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press [ # ] and go to Step 16; otherwise, continue with Step 12. To record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, ift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record after the beep. The prompt or Announcement can be up to four minutes ong. 5-25

106 System Management Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 15. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Repeat, if necessary. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Return to Step 11. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve and save the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. The system pays: Approved. Menu Definition saved. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Modifying the Night Menu Prompt 5-26 Update Form 5 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Night Menu Prompt; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. To change the Night Menu Prompt: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1. the existing prompt, press #. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Night Menu Prompt. To use

107 System Management Press [ 1 ] when you are finished recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record the Night Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back the Night Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete the Night Menu Prompt. The system pays: Deeted. To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1. To use the existing prompt, press #. Return to Step 5. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve the Night Menu Prompt. The system pays: Approved. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Biingua Mode Paying the Menu Definition and Announcements This procedure ets you isten to the current Menu Definition and any Announcement associated with a Seector Code. The Menu Definition is accessed through the Day Menu. To pay the current Menu Definition: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. press 2. If finished, press * #. 3. Press [ 1 ] for the Day Menu. The system pays: For the Night Menu, To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-27

108 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu prompt, press 1. To pay the Menu Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ] to pay the Menu Definition. The system pays the current Menu Definition. f an Announcement is recorded, the system pays the Seector Code and associated Announcement number. Either: Press [ # ] if you do not want to isten to the Announcement and go to the next Seector Code. Press [ 1 ] to pay the Primary Language Announcement assigned to the Seector Code. Press [ 2 ] to pay the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Seector Code. The system pays the recorded Announcement. 7. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Paying the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and Secondary Languages To isten to the current Day or Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and Secondary Languages seected for Biingua Mode: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu, press 2. If finished, press * #. Either: Press [ 1 ] for the Day Menu. Press [ 2 ] for the Night Menu. The system pays: To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. 5-28

109 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu prompt, press 1. To pay the Menu Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #. Press [ 1 ] to pay the menu prompt. The system pays: To pay Primary Language prompt, press 1. To pay Secondary Language prompt, press 2. If finished, press * #. Either: Press [ 1 ] for the Primary Language prompt. Press [ 2 ] for the Secondary Language prompt The system pays the Day or Night Menu Prompt (depending on your choice in Step 3) in either the Primary or Secondary Language (depending on your choice in Step 6). Repeat Step 6 to pay the Day or Night Menu Prompt in the other anguage. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-29

110 System Management Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements Update Forms 3 and 4A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompts; update forms 3, 3A, and 3B for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Automated Attendant Announcements. Then use the updated forms whie performing the foowing procedure. CAUTION: It is important to understand that you must approve each eement (that is, the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as we as save a of these entries (in Step 21). If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries, your entries wi be ost. This procedure is designed to ensure that caers do not hear the incompete menu whie you are in the process of modifying it. To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press press 2. If finished, press * Press [ 1 ]. The system pays: 1. For the Night Menu, #. To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: Pease enter a seector code from 1 to 9. When finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #. If you want to modify ony the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, go to Step 10. Otherwise, continue with Step

111 System Management Enter a Seector Code from 1 through 9. The system pays the current Seector Code Action (or Announcement number and Announcement), then asks: Do you want to make a modification? or 6 to cance. Press 9 to confirm Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Seector Code. At this point, do one of the foowing: If you want to return the Seector Code to the factory setting (Direct Extension Transfer for Seector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to receptionist s maibox for Seector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Seector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10. If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Seector Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number, foowed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Seector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10. If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9. Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11. The system pays: To record a new announcement, press 1; announcement, press #. Press [ ] [ # ] to finish modifying the Menu Definition. The system pays: to use existing To record Primary Language prompt, press 1. To record Secondary Language prompt, press 2. To save Menu Definition changes, press #. If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 21; otherwise, continue with Step 12. Lift the handset and: Press [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Primary Language. Press [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language. Record the prompt or Announcement (up to four minutes in ength) after the beep. Press [ 1 ] when you are finished recording. 5-31

112 System Management Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 16. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. Return to Step 12. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement. The system pays: Approved. To record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the other anguage, repeat Steps 12 through 16. Do one of the foowing: If you approved the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 21. If you approved an Announcement, go to Step 19. Press [ ] [ # ] to move up a menu eve. Press [ ] [ # ] to move up another menu eve. Press [ # ] to approve and save a changes. The new Day Menu Prompts, Announcements, and Seector Code changes now take effect. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Modifying the Night Menu Prompts Update Form 5 and 5A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Night Menu Prompts; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. To change the Night Menu Prompts: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant. The system pays: To program the Day Menu, press 1. press 2. If finished, press * #. For the Night Menu, 5-32

113 System Management Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: To pay the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: To record Primary Language prompt, press 1. To record Secondary Language prompt, press 2. To save any recordings, press #. Lift the handset: Press [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language. Press [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language Record the prompt after the beep. Press [ 1 ] when you are finished recording. Choose an option or skip this step: Press [ 2 ] [ 1 ] to immediatey re-record this Night Menu Prompt. Begin recording immediatey after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording. Repeat, if desired. Press [ 2 ] [ 3 ] to pay back this Night Menu Prompt. Press [ ] [ 3 ] to deete this Night Menu Prompt. The system pays: Deeted. To record Primary Language prompt, press 1. To record Secondary Language prompt, press 2. To save any recordings, press #. Return to Step 5. Press [ ] [ # ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt. The system pays: Approved. To record the Night Menu Prompt in the other anguage, repeat Steps 5 through 9. Press [ # ] to approve a changes. The new Night Menu Prompts now take effect. 12. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-33

114 System Management Group Ca Distribution Use this communications system procedure to specify a new outside ine on which you want Automated Attendant Service. Update Line Coverage on Form A, Page 1 of the System Panner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS-AA ines before you begin. To assign VMS-AA ines to Hunt Group 7: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter the System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]*. At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ]. At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA ine to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage coumn of Form A, Page 1. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. (Be carefu not to choose 3 VMS Line Cover because you wi assign VMS Line Coverage rather than Automated Attendant Service to the ine.) To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS-AA ine. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. VMS Hunt Deay Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or deayed ca handing. Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Panner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Deay setting before you begin. To change the VMS Hunt Deay setting: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. 2. Enter the System Password, if required. 3. Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]. 4. Press [ Next Data ] unti the appropriate vaue dispays. 5. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-34

115 System Management Automatic Extension Privacy If VMS Hunt Deay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from accidentay picking up cas sent to the voice messaging system. Update Form B1 of the System Panner for the communications system to show Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) as Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions. To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter the System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 3 ] [ 0 ] [ 4 ]. Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 dispays. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. If additiona PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on Form B1, repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each one. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. VMS Hunt Schedue Use this communications system procedure to specify when the communications system is to route cas to the voice messaging system. Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Panner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedue setting before you begin. To change the VMS Hunt Schedue setting: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter the System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 7 ]. Press [ Next Data ] unti the appropriate vaue dispays. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. 5-35

116 System Management Modifying Maiboxes The voice messaging system is shipped with maiboxes aready created for a predetermined number of extensions. If a Maibox Expansion Card is instaed, maibox capacity is increased. The characteristics of maiboxes are as foows: Receptionist s Extension. Extension 10 has a maximum storage capacity of 60 minutes (or 120 messages). Each message has a maximum ength of four minutes. A Other Extensions. Other extensions each have a maximum storage capacity of 20 minutes (or 40 messages). 5-36

117 System Management Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Maiboxes (Press [ 4 ]) Maibox Number (Enter Number +[ # ]) Yes Maibox No Number Exists? Reinitiaize Create Main Menu Maibox (Press [ 3 ]) (Press [ 4 ]) Reinitiaize Maibox (Press [ 4 ]) Administer Outcaing (Press [ 5 ]) Program Maibox Language (Press [ 6 ]) Deete Maibox (Press[ * ][ 3 ]) Figure 5-3. Modifying Maiboxes 5-37

118 System Management If you need to change current maibox programming, you can use the instructions presented in this section. For exampe: If an empoyee eaves the company, you can set up the previousy assigned maibox number for a new empoyee. To do so, use Reinitiaizing a Maibox, which returns the maibox to its factory settings and deetes any messages that were in the maibox. If you want to reassign a maibox (move a maibox from the current extension to a different one), first use Deeting a Maibox then use Creating a Maibox. You may aso need to perform these procedures when you increase the number of maiboxes as the resut of upgrading the PARTNER MAIL VS configuration. Keep in mind that you shoud aways deete maiboxes from extensions to which you connect auxiiary equipment (such as doorphones and fax machines) to keep the maximum number of maiboxes avaiabe for subscribers. If a subscriber forgets his or her password, use Reinitiaizing a Password to return the password to the factory setting (1234). If a subscriber woud ike to interact with Voice Mai Service using a anguage different from the one assigned to his or her maibox, use Modifying a Maibox s Language. If you want to activate or deactivate Outcaing for a subscriber s maibox, refer to Administering Outcaing for a Maibox. As the defaut setting, Outcaing privieges are denied. Even after you activate Outcaing for a subscriber s maibox, the subscriber must aso turn on this feature and specify an Outcaing number by foowing the procedure in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System. Before you change maibox assignments, you shoud review the next two sections Hardware Considerations and Guest Maiboxes. 5-38

119 System Management Hardware Considerations After you deete a maibox, you can reassign that maibox to another subscriber s extension using the Creating a Maibox procedure. Remember that maibox numbers and extension numbers are the same. You can aso assign avaiabe maiboxes to extensions that do not have phones connected to them so that guests empoyees who work off-premises most of the time, such as saespeope can access messages whie on the road. See Guest Maiboxes on the next page for detais. After initia instaation, you have defaut maiboxes for a predetermined number of extensions. When you reassign maiboxes, you can use any maibox in your system s dia pan. The dia pan is the maximum number of extensions supported by your system. This means on a PARTNER Pus system, you can create maiboxes for extensions 11 through 33; on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System, you can create maiboxes for extensions 11 through 41 (on the 5-sot carrier); on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system, you can create maiboxes for extensions 11 through 57. (Note that the maibox at extension 10 cannot be deeted.) Figures 5-4 and 5-5 shows the dia pan for each system. PARTNER Pus Contro Unit or PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier Expansion Carrier Line Jacks Line Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks 206 Modues 206 Modues Figure 5-4. Dia Pan for PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER

120 System Management PARTNER ACS 2-Sot Carrier PARTNER ACS 5-Sot Carrier Line Jacks Line Jacks Line Jacks Line Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks 206 Modue Extension Jacks 206 Modues Figure 5-5. Dia Pan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems Keep in mind that the modues you have instaed in your carrier may differ from these figures, and wi determine the number of extension jacks to which you can connect phones. Guest Maiboxes You can assign avaiabe maiboxes to extensions in the dia pan that do not have phones connected to them. Guest maiboxes are usefu for empoyees who work off-premises most of the time. Guest maiboxes provide a the benefits of a reguar maibox (incuding Outcaing privieges) except the subscriber does not receive visua indication of a message deposited in the maibox since there is no phone (and therefore no message waiting ight) associated with the maibox. Guests can ca the voice messaging system from any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages. 5-40

121 System Management Review the foowing notes before you program guest maiboxes: If you have empty sots in the carrier, you can assign guest maiboxes to those extensions in the dia pan that correspond to the empty sot(s). When you assign guest maiboxes, it is recommended that you start assignments from the high end of the dia pan. (On a PARTNER Pus system, work backwards from extension 33; on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system, work backwards from extension 57; on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System, work backwards from extension 41.) After you create a guest maibox, use Automatic VMS Cover, ater in this section, to assign automatic coverage to the guest maibox. Cas to these extensions are routed immediatey to the maibox the ca does not try ringing the extension first. If you do not have empty sots in the carrier, you can assign guest maiboxes to the unused extension numbers associated with the voice messaging system modue. You aso need to assign automatic coverage to these guest maiboxes. You can use any of the six extensions on the voice messaging system modue for guest maibox assignments. Cas routed to these extensions are routed to the subscriber s maibox depending on the extension used. Refer to the tabe beow to determine whether cas are routed on an immediate or deayed basis. For a 2-port system: If the bottom two extensions are used, cas are routed to the subscriber s maibox on an immediate basis. If the remaining four extensions are used, cas are routed to the subscriber s maibox after four rings (or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interva). For a 4-port system: If the bottom four extensions are used, cas are routed to the subscriber s maibox on an immediate basis. If the remaining two extensions are used, cas are routed to the subscriber s maibox after four rings (or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interva). A 2-port voice messaging system uses the bottom two extension numbers associated with the sot in which the modue is instaed (see Figures 2-1 and 2-2 in Chapter 2). For exampe, if the modue is instaed in the ast sot on a PARTNER Pus (see Figure 5-4), it uses extensions 32 and 33. In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest maiboxes. A 4-port system uses the bottom four extensions (for exampe, 30, 31, 32, and 33). In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest maiboxes. 5-41

122 System Management Checking a Maibox s Status Use this procedure to determine if a maibox exists: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes currenty exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox whose status you want to check foowed by [ # ], or simpy press [ # ]. The system responds as foows: If you entered a maibox number foowed by [ # ], the system tes you whether or not the maibox exists. If you entered [ # ], the system tes you the number of the first existing maibox Press [ # ] repeatedy to hear the next existing maibox number. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Deeting a Maibox 5-42 Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show maiboxes to be deeted; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. Review the foowing notes before you deete a maibox: The receptionist s maibox (at extension 10) cannot be deeted. Any messages in the maibox are ost when a maibox is deeted. The message ight is turned off. The persona greeting is ost. If you deete a maibox from an extension that has VMS Cover assigned, unassign Automatic VMS Cover or remove the VMS Cover button. This action prevents unanswered intercom and transferred cas to this extension from being transferred to the receptionist s extension. If you deete a maibox that was assigned a ine owner using VMS Line Cover, either deete ine ownership from that ine or assign a different maibox as the owner of that ine. Simiary, if you deete a maibox that was assigned a ine owner using Extension Line Coverage, either unassign coverage or assign a different extension as the owner.

123 System Management SECURITY ALERT: As a safeguard against to fraud, deete unused maiboxes. To deete a maibox: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox you want to deete foowed by [ # ]. The system says whether or not the maibox exists, then: To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete the maibox, press * D. Press [ ] [ 3 ]. The system pays: Maibox XX has YY new messages and ZZ od messages. Do you want to deete? Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. Press [ 9 ] to confirm maibox deetion. The system pays: Deeted. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-43

124 System Management Creating a Maibox Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show maiboxes to be created; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. The system is shipped with maiboxes for a predetermined number of extensions. If you aready have the maximum amount of maiboxes, you must deete an unused maibox before you can create a new one. Review the foowing notes before you create a maibox: Maiboxes can be created for extensions 11 through 33 for the PARTNER Pus, 11 through 41 for PARTNER Advanced systems, and 11 through 57 for the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 system. See Hardware Considerations earier in this chapter for detais. When a maibox is created, it uses the factory set password (1234) and the factory set Maibox Language in either the System Language (in Monoingua Mode) or Primary Language (in Biingua Mode). The Maibox Language can be changed on a per maibox basis. See Modifying a Maibox Language, ater in this chapter for detais. You can create a guest maibox for an extension that does not have a phone connected to it. See Guest Maiboxes earier in this chapter for detais. To create a maibox: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox you want to create foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: Maibox XX does not exist. To create this maibox, press 4. If finished with this maibox, press * #, or press # for the next maibox. 5-44

125 System Management Press [ 4 ]. The system pays: Created. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Reinitiaizing a Password If a subscriber forgets the password for his or her maibox, you can reinitiaize the password to the factory setting of 1234 so the user can retrieve messages. Remind the subscriber to change the password immediatey after ogging in for the first time. To reinitiaize a password to 1234: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox whose password you want to reinitiaize foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: Maibox XX exists. To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete the maibox, press * D. If finished with this maibox, press * #, Or press # for the next maibox. Press [ 3 ]. The system pays: The password has been reinitiaized. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-45

126 System Management Reinitiaizing a Maibox To prepare a previousy used maibox for a new subscriber, you can reinitiaize the maibox. This procedure deetes any messages eft in the maibox and turns off the phone s message ight (if it), erases the persona greeting (if recorded), changes the password back to the factory setting (1234), and changes the Maibox Language back to either the System Language (Monoingua Mode) or the Primary Language (Biingua Mode). To reinitiaize a maibox: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. 3. Enter the number of the maibox you want to reinitiaize foowed by [ # ]. 4. The system pays: Maibox XX exists. To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete, press * D. If finished with this maibox, press * #, or press # for the next maibox. Press [ 4 ]. The system pays: Maibox XX has YY new and ZZ od messages. Do you want to reinitiaize this maibox? Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. 5. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays: Reinitiaized. 6. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-46

127 System Management Paying a Maibox s Language To pay the anguage currenty used for a maibox: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox whose anguage you want to pay foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: Maibox XX exists. To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete the maibox, press * D. If finished with this maibox, press * #, or press # for the next maibox. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: To pay Maibox Language, press 2. To modify Maibox Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: Maibox anguage is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage). Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-47

128 System Management Modifying a Maibox s Language Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show the anguages assigned to maiboxes; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. To modify a maibox s anguage: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes currenty exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox whose anguage you want to modify foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: Maibox XX exists. To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete the maibox, press * D. If finished with this maibox, press * #, or press # for the next maibox. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: To pay Maibox Language, press 2 To modify Maibox Language, press 6. If finished, press * #. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays the current Maibox Language, then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired anguage. Enter the number corresponding to the anguage you want to use for this maibox. The system pays: For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current anguage), press 9 to confirm or 6 to cance. 5-48

129 System Management 7. Either: Press [ 9 ] to confirm. The system pays: Maibox Language has been changed. Press [ 6 ] to cance. The system pays: Maibox Language has not been changed. 8. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. Administering Outcaing for a Maibox The Outcaing feature dias a teephone or pager number to notify a subscriber that a new message has arrived in the subscriber s voice maibox. With this feature subscribers can be aerted to the arriva of new messages whether they re at their desks, on the road, or at an aternate work ocation. And subscribers can determine the schedue for when Outcaing begins and ends. Before subscribers can turn on Outcaing, specify the Outcaing number, and estabish an Outcaing schedue (optiona), you must assign Outcaing privieges for their maiboxes. You may aso remove Outcaing privieges by foowing the instructions beow. Be sure to update Form 2 to indicate the current status of Outcaing privieges for each maibox. CAUTION: Before you assign maiboxes Outcaing privieges, you shoud review the system performance and security issues discussed in detai in Chapter 1. There are no restrictions on the Outcaing Numbers entered by subscribers. Therefore, it is strongy recommended that you imit the number of subscribers who have the Outcaing priviege. And ca restrictions shoud be used for the communications system. See Outgoing Ca Restriction in Chapter 4 for detais. To assign or remove Outcaing privieges for a maibox: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 5-49

130 System Management Press [ 4 ] to program maiboxes. The system tes you how many maiboxes exist and how many are aowed, then: Pease enter the maibox number foowed by # or press # for the next maibox. Enter the number of the maibox for which you want to activate/deactivate Outcaing privieges foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: Maibox XX exists. To reinitiaize the password, press 3. To reinitiaize the maibox, press 4. To administer Outcaing, press 5. To program the Maibox Language, press 6. To deete the maibox, press * D. If finished with this maibox, press * #, or press # for the next maibox. Press [ 5 ] to administer Outcaing. The system pays: To turn on Outcaing, press 9. To turn off Outcaing, press 6. Either: Press [ 9 ] to activate Outcaing. The system pays: Outcaing is turned on. Press [ 6 ] to deactivate Outcaing. The system pays: Outcaing is turned off To activate/deactivate Outcaing for another maibox, repeat steps 3 through 5. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-50

131 System Management Automatic VMS Cover Use this communications system procedure to assign automatic voice mai coverage to the appropriate extensions. Update Form B2 of the System Panner for the communications system before you begin. To assign Automatic VMS Cover to extensions: VMS Cover Rings Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter the System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 3 ] [ 1 ] [ 0 ]. Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 1 Assigned. To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the extension number shows on the dispay. Then repeat Step 5. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. Use this communications system procedure* to change the number of times cas shoud ring at the extension before they are sent to the subscriber s maibox. Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Panner for the communications system before you begin. To change the number of times cas ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter the System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 1 ] [ 1 ] [ 7 ]. Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting. Seect another procedure or exit programming mode. * VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-51

132 System Management Line Coverage This feature ets caers who ca in on a covered ine eave messages in the maibox of a specific subscriber. Line coverage typicay is used for persona ines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant Service is not used. There are two ways to set up ine coverage: For VMS Line Coverage, you must program the voice messaging system s Line Ownership feature and the communication system s Group Ca Distribution (#206)* feature. With this method, when a ca on a covered ine is not answered within five rings, the voice messaging system routes the caer to the ine owner s maibox. The caer then hears the persona greeting for the ine owner s maibox. For Extension Line Coverage, you ony need to program the communication system s Line Coverage Extension (#208) feature. This method provides fexibiity for cas ringing on covered ines. You can specify the number of times cas ring at the user s extension before going to the user s maibox (using the communication system s VMS Cover Rings (#117) feature). In addition, if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on, cas on the ine can go immediatey to coverage. For both types of ine coverage, voice mai coverage must be on at the user s extension. IMPORTANT: A ine can be assigned coverage as described in this section or it can be assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage a singe ine cannot be assigned both types of coverage. * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. Line Coverage Extension (#208) and VMS Cover Rings (#117) are not avaiabe on a systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-52

133 System Management VMS Line Coverage If you specify VMS Line Coverage for any system ines, you must assign an owner to the covered ines to prevent the system from transferring caers who ca in on those ines to the receptionist s extension. This section provides instructions on how to: Use Line Ownership (see Figure 5-6) to scan, assign, modify, and deete current assignments for VMS Line Coverage Use Group Ca Distribution to specify new ines for VMS Line Coverage Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Line Ownership (Press [ 6 ]) Scan Line Ownership (Press [ 2 ]) Assign Line Ownership (Press [ 4 ]) Modify Line Ownership (Press [ 6 ]) Deete Line Ownership (Press[ ][ 3 ]) Figure 5-6. Line Ownership 5-53

134 System Management Scanning Line Ownership To review the current owners of outside ines: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. d. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 6 ] for ine ownership. The system pays: To scan ine ownership, press 2; to assign ine ownership, press 4; to modify ine ownership, press 6. To deete ine ownership, press * D. Press [ 2 ]. The system pays: Pease enter the CO ine number foowed by #, or press # for the next ine owner. Enter a specific outside ine number foowed by [ # ], or press [ # ] for the first outside ine number that has been assigned an owner. The system responds as foows: If you entered a ine number foowed by [ # ], the system tes you whether or not an owner is assigned. If you entered [ # ], the system tes you the maibox number of the owner of the first outside ine that has an owner. Press [ # ] to hear the maibox number for the next outside ine that has an owner. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-54

135 System Management Assigning Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show the ine number that requires coverage and the ine owner s extension number; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. Make sure you aso use Group Ca Distribution (#206) ater in this section to assign coverage to ines. To associate an outside ine with a specific subscriber s maibox: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. d. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 6 ] for ine ownership. The system pays: To scan ine ownership, press 2; to assign ine ownership, press 4; to modify ine ownership, press 6. To deete ine ownership, press * D. Press [ 4 ]. The system pays: Pease enter the CO ine number foowed by #. If finished, press * #. Enter the number of the outside ine that you want to associate with a specific subscriber s maibox foowed by [ # ]. If the ine aready has an owner, the system announces the maibox number of that owner. Otherwise, the system pays: CO ine X has no owner. Entre the maibox number of the new ine owner foowed by #. If finished, press * #. Enter the maibox number foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: CO Line X owner is maibox YY. If the maibox does not exist, you are tod so. See Creating a Maibox earier in this chapter for instructions on creating maiboxes. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 unti you assign ine ownership for a of the appropriate ines. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-55

136 System Management Modifying Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to ine ownership; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. To change ine ownership: Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. Press [ 6 ] for ine ownership. The system pays: To scan ine ownership, press 2; to assign ine ownership, press 4; to modify ine ownership, press 6. To deete ine ownership, press * D. Press [ 6 ]. The system pays: Pease enter the CO ine number foowed by #. If finished, press * #. Enter the number of the outside ine whose ownership you want to modify foowed by [ # ]. If the ine does not have an owner, the system tes you so. Otherwise, the system pays: CO ine X owner is maibox YY. Enter the maibox number of the new ine owner foowed by #. If finished, press * #. Enter the new maibox number foowed by [ # ]. The system pays: CO Line X owner is maibox YY. If the maibox does not exist, you are tod so. See Creating a Maibox earier in this chapter for instructions on creating maiboxes. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to modify the ine ownership for any other ines. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-56

137 System Management Deeting Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show the ownership assignments you want to deete; then use the updated form whie performing the foowing procedure. NOTE: If you remove ine ownership, either use Group Ca Distribution (#206) to remove VMS Line Coverage from the ine or assign a new maibox number as the owner of the ine to prevent the system from transferring caers who ca in on the covered ine to the receptionist s extension. To deete an existing ine owner assignment: 1. Access the Programming Main Menu: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the Password and press [ # ]. d. Press [ 9 ]. The system pays the system programming options. 2. Press [ 6 ] for ine ownership. The system pays: To scan ine ownership, press 2; to assign ine ownership, press 4; to modify ine ownership, press 6. To deete ine ownership, press * D. 3. Press [ ] [ 3 ]. The system pays: Pease enter the CO ine number foowed by #. If finished, press * #. 4. Enter the number of the outside ine whose ownership you want to deete foowed by [ # ]. The system responds as foows: If the ine has an owner, the system tes you the maibox number of the owner and asks you to confirm the deetion. Go to Step 5. If the ine has no owner, the system tes you so and asks you to enter another CO ine number. Enter another ine number foowed by [ # ] or go to Step Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to deete the ownership assignment. The system pays: Deeted. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to deete other ine ownership assignments. 7. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit. 5-57

138 System Management Group Ca Distribution Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside ines for VMS Line Coverage. Update Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage of the System Panner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS-MAIL ines before you begin. To modify VMS-MAIL ines assignments: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. Enter System Password, if required. Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 6 ]*. At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ]. At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL ine to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage coumn of Form A, Page 1. Press [ Next Data ] unti the dispay reads 3 VMS Line Cover or 2 Not Assigned. (Be carefu not to choose 1 Assigned because you wi assign Automated Attendant Service coverage rather than ownership to the ine.) To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. Then press [ Next Data ] unti 3 VMS Line Cover or 2 Not Assigned is dispayed. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-58

139 System Management Extension Line Coverage After assigning Extension Line Coverage, make sure VMS coverage is on for the extension. See Automatic VMS Cover earier in this chapter or VMS Cover ater in this chapter. Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside ines for Extension Line Coverage*. To assign VMS-MAIL ines specified on Form A, Page 1, Line Coverage, to specific extensions: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ]. 2. Enter System Password, if required. 3. Press [ # ] [ 2 ] [ 0 ] [ 8 ] At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL ine to be programmed as indicated by the extension number in the Line Coverage coumn of Form A, Page 1. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension in the VMS-MAIL coumn. To program another ine, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] unti the appropriate ine number dispays. Then repeat Step 5. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming. * This feature is not avaiabe on a systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-59

140 System Management Teephone Button Programming Update Form C of the System Panner for the communications system if you change button programming for a subscriber s extension. It is recommended that the foowing features be programmed on buttons on each subscriber s system phone: VMS Cover aows the subscriber to manuay turn on and off voice mai coverage. Do Not Disturb aows the subscriber to send caers to his or her maibox immediatey without first ringing the subscriber s extension. Voice Maibox Transfer aows the subscriber to transfer caers directy to other subscribers voice maiboxes. VM Messages aows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system for message retrieva with the touch of a button. The procedures in this section use Centraized Teephone Programming. VMS Cover To give a subscriber the abiity to turn voice mai coverage on and off, you can program a VMS Cover button on the subscriber s system phone. To program a VMS Cover button: 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. 2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. 3. Press a programmabe button with ights. 4. Press [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 5 ]*. 5. Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. 6. Labe the button at the user s extension. * In some countries, the feature code for VMS Cover is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-60

141 System Management Do Not Disturb Used in conjunction with either automatic or manua extension coverage, this button ets subscribers send caers immediatey to their voice maibox. To program a Do Not Disturb button: 3. Press a programmabe button with ights Voice Maibox Transfer 1. Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. 2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ]. Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. Labe the button at the user s extension. A Voice Maibox Transfer button ets any system user transfer cas directy to another subscriber s maibox, without ringing the extension. If, for exampe, a caer wants to tak to a subscriber who is on vacation, the receptionist can transfer the ca directy to the subscriber s maibox by pressing this button and entering the subscriber s extension number (or pressing an Auto Dia button). The voice messaging system answers the ca, the caer hears the subscriber s persona greeting (if recorded), and the caer can then eave a message for the subscriber. To program a Voice Maibox Transfer button: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. Press a programmabe button. Press [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 4 ]*. Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. Labe the button at the user s extension. * In some countries, the feature code for Voice Maibox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. 5-61

142 System Management Voice Mai Messages This intercom Auto Dia button aows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with one touch of a button. To program a Voice Mai Messages button: Press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Centra Te Program ]. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed. Press a programmabe button. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]. Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] to exit programming mode. Labe the button at the user s extension. 5-62

143 Troubeshooting 6 Contents When You Need Hep Automated Attendant Service Outside Caers Hear Ringing, but System Does Not Answer Outside Caers Hear Sience, Tones, or Ringing During Transfer System Does Not Answer Immediatey System Cuts Off Part of Greeting System Transfers Ca to Receptionist Before Paying the Menu Prompt System Does Not Transfer Cas Propery System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits Unanswered Transferred Cas Ring Continuay Ca Answer Service Ca Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer Cas Ca Answer Service Terminates Message Whie Caer Is Recording Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Maibox Voice Mai Service Subscriber Unabe to Log In to Voice Mai Date or Time in Message Headers is Incorrect Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber Subscribers Hear Busy Signa When Caing In to Voice Mai Message Light Does Not Turn Off Outcaing Is Deayed Outcaing to a Digita Pager Is Not Working Outcaing to a Teephone Is Not Working Language Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages Cannot Understand Language Prompts i

144 Troubeshooting 6 When You Need Hep If you have a probem with your system, you may be abe to sove it yoursef by foowing the appropriate troubeshooting procedures described in this chapter. If not, you can ca for hep: in the continenta U.S., ca the Technica Service Center at ; outside the continenta U.S., ca your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer. The foowing sections describe various difficuties that might occur, possibe causes for the difficuty, and procedures you can foow to try to sove the probem. 6-1

145 Troubeshooting Automated Attendant Service Outside Caers Hear Ringing, but System Does Not Answer Possibe Cause 1: This is norma when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy. What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For exampe, you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak caing hours, you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you can reduce the ength of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt. Possibe Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS modue may not be instaed correcty. What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS modue to make sure it is securey mounted in the contro unit. Aso check the modue s LEDs: the Power LED shoud be steady green and the Status LED shoud not be it. If the Power and Status LEDs are it, perform the System Save Reset A procedure by entering 989-RESET ( ) after you og in as the System Manager. If the Power LED is not it, power down the contro unit, reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS modue, and power up the contro unit. If the modue is working propery after one minute, the probem is soved. If the modue sti does not work propery, go to Possibe Cause 3. Possibe Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correcty. What to do: Refer to Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS modue. Then use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7. If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the correct extension numbers. If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, ca for hep*. * In the continenta U.S., hep is avaiabe at Outside the continenta U.S., ca your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer. 6-2

146 Troubeshooting Outside Caers Hear Sience, Tones, or Ringing During Transfer Possibe Cause: Music On Hod is not set up for the system. What to do: See Music On Hod (#602) in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. System Does Not Answer Immediatey Possibe Cause 1: Automated Attendant Service is programmed for Deayed ca handing. What to do: If you do not want Deayed ca handing, program the communications system s VMS Hunt Deay feature for Immediate ca handing. Possibe Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS extensions may be busy. What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For exampe, you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak caing hours, you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you can reduce the ength of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt. System Cuts Off Part of Greeting Possibe Cause 1: You may have begun recording the greeting too soon. What to do: Re-record the greeting. After the prompt to record the greeting, pause a moment before speaking. Possibe Cause 2: A touch-tone signa may have been recorded accidentay with the greeting. What to do: Re-record the greeting. System Transfers Ca to Receptionist Before Paying the Menu Prompt Possibe Cause: The extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS modue were not assigned to Hunt Group 7. What to do: Refer to Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS modue. Then use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group

147 Troubeshooting System Does Not Transfer Cas Propery Possibe Cause 1: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers cas, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrecty. What to do: Foow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service. If outside cas are not transferred to the correct extension or group, foow the instructions for Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt as appropriate for Monoingua or Biingua Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition. If outside cas are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to Possibe Cause 2. Possibe Cause 2: A vaid destination was not entered by the caer. What to do: Make sure a vaid destination was entered. Check the Programming and Use guide for your communications system to determine vaid extension and group numbers. System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits Possibe Cause 1: System is not receiving touchtones. What to do: The voice messaging system may not be abe to interpret touchtones whie a greeting pays. Wait unti the greeting finishes before entering the touchtones. If you are using a speakerphone, turn off the microphone. Possibe Cause 2: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers cas, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrecty. What to do: Foow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service. If outside cas are not transferred to the correct extension or group, foow the instructions for Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt as appropriate for Monoingua or Biingua Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition. If outside cas are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to Possibe Cause 3. Possibe Cause 3: The ine is too noisy. What to do: Ca your oca teephone company. 6-4

148 Troubeshooting Unanswered Transferred Cas Ring Continuay Possibe Cause: In some countries, the teephone company does not aways provide a far-end disconnect signa. This causes the ine to remain open even after the caer hangs up. What to do: Assign voice mai coverage to a extensions in the system; this is especiay important for extension 10. Aso, make sure voice mai coverage is on at extension 10 at night when no one is around to manuay disconnect cas. The voice messaging system wi disconnect any ca to an extension that has voice mai coverage after 15 seconds of sience. 6-5

149 Troubeshooting Ca Answer Service Ca Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer Cas Possibe Cause: Cas ring four times at a subscriber s extension to give the subscriber a chance to answer the ca. What to do: Recommend that subscribers program a Do Not Disturb button on their system phones. They shoud turn on the feature when they eave their desks or whenever they are too busy to answer cas. Cas to extensions with Do Not Disturb on are answered immediatey. Ca Answer Service Terminates Message Whie Caer Is Recording Possibe Cause: The caer s recording time exceeded the maibox s message time imit. (The time imit for recording a message is four minutes.) What to do: Let the caer know the recording time imit. Aso et the caer know that he or she can press [ ] [ 8 ] and the appropriate extension number to transfer to the extension again this avoids making another outside ca to finish the message if necessary. Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Maibox Possibe Cause: The maibox is fu. What to do: Od messages must be deeted reguary from maiboxes. When a subscriber s maibox is fu, the caer cannot eave a message in that maibox but is given the option of transferring to another extension. For a subscribers, maiboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or 40 messages, whichever is reached first). The receptionist s maibox at extension 10 can store up to 60 minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages). 6-6

150 Troubeshooting Voice Mai Service Subscriber Unabe to Log In to Voice Mai Possibe Cause 1: A subscriber entered the number of a maibox that does not exist. What to do: Make sure the subscriber enters an existing maibox number. Use Paying a Maibox s Status in Chapter 5 to check the status of existing maiboxes. If the subscriber tries again and succeeds, the probem is soved. If the subscriber sti cannot og in, go to Possibe Cause 2. Possibe Cause 2: The subscriber forgot his or her password or entered it incorrecty. What to do: The subscriber shoud try entering the password again. If the subscriber can og in, the probem is soved. If the subscriber sti cannot og in, re-initiaize the password as described in Chapter 5. (If you forget the password for ogin 99, you must ca for hep*.) Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect Possibe Cause: The day, date, or time programmed for the communications system is incorrect or the PARTNER MAIL VS system was not updated with the correct time. What to do: Refer to System Date (#101), System Day (#102), or System Time (#103) in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system to check the day, date, or time settings. If the day, date, and time are correct, choose one of these procedures and re-enter the correct vaue. After one minute, this updates the day, date, and time on the voice messaging system. If message headers for new messages are sti incorrect, ca for hep*. * In the continenta U.S., hep is avaiabe at Outside the continenta U.S., ca your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer. 6-7

151 Troubeshooting Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber Possibe Cause 1: The recipient s maibox is fu or does not have enough space remaining to accommodate the message. What to do: Od messages must be deeted reguary from maiboxes. When a subscriber s maibox is fu, the caer cannot eave a message in that maibox but is given the option of transferring to another extension. The sender cannot resend the forwarded message unti the maibox has more message space. For a subscribers, maiboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or 40 messages). The receptionist s maibox at extension 10 can store up to 60 minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages). Possibe Cause 2: The message has been forwarded the maximum of 13 times. What to do: Verify the number of times the message has been forwarded. Subscribers Hear Busy Signa When Caing In to Voice Mai Possibe Cause 1: This is norma when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy. What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For exampe, you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak caing hours, you can reduce the number options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you can reduce the ength of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt. If you have a 2-port system, you may want to consider upgrading to a 4-port system. Possibe Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS modue may not be instaed correcty. What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS modue to make sure it is securey mounted in the contro unit. Aso check the modue s LEDs: the Power LED shoud be steady green and the Status LED shoud not be it. If the Power and Status LEDs are it, perform the System Save Reset A procedure by entering 989-RESET ( ) after you og in as the System Manager. If the Power LED is not it, power down the contro unit, reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS modue, and power up the contro unit. If the modue is working propery after one minute, the probem is soved. If the modue sti does not work propery, go to Possibe Cause

152 Troubeshooting Possibe Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correcty. What to do: Refer to Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS modue. Then use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7. If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the correct extension numbers. If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, ca for hep*. Message Light Does Not Turn Off Possibe Cause: There are messages in the maibox. The message ight stays on if there are any new (unretrieved) messages in the maibox. What to do: Retrieve or deete a new messages from the maibox. Outcaing Is Deayed Possibe Cause 1: There is heavy ca traffic and Outcaing voume on the mai system. The Outcaing port is aso used in ca handing. If your system performs heavy Outcaing or has heavy ca voume, the port may frequenty be unavaiabe for Outcaing. What to do: You may need more ports (if you have a 2-port system), or you may need to reduce the number of subscribers who have Outcaing privieges. Outcaing to a Digita Pager Is Not Working Possibe Cause 1: The Outcaing number is not propery programmed. What to do: Check that the Outcaing number is correct. If not, reprogram the number. Possibe Cause 2: Insufficient number of pauses in Outcaing number. What to do: It is important to incude a sufficient number of pauses between the pager number and the Persona Identification Number (PIN), or between the pager number and the caback number. Leave severa pauses after the pager number. You must aow enough time for the paging system to answer before the PIN and/or caback number is diaed. In addition, a pause shoud foow the 9 diaed to get an outside ine. And if the communications system is set to rotary (rather than touchtone) service, pauses may need to be incuded after every digit in the Outcaing number. * In the continenta U.S., hep is avaiabe at Outside the continenta U.S., ca your Lucent Technoogies Representative or Authorized Deaer. 6-9

153 Troubeshooting Possibe Cause 3: A ine may not be avaiabe to pace a ca. What to do: If a ines are in use when the system attempts to outca, the outca does not go through. The mai system attempts to outca three times within a minimum time interva of 15 minutes between attempts. When subsequent attempts are made during a peak ine-activity period, these attempts may be deayed much onger. And if the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue end time occurs before the additiona attempts, these attempts wi not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more ines if the probem occurs frequenty. Possibe Cause 4: The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue, or the Outcaing period was ended. What to do: This is standard operation. Outcaing is performed ony during the hours specified by the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue. Outcaing wi be done ony for message received during the Outcaing period. Possibe Cause 5: Outcaing may not be turned on. What to do: Have the maibox owner verify that Outcaing is turned on. The System Manager shoud aso verify that the Outcaing priviege is assigned. Outcaing to a Teephone Is Not Working Possibe Cause 1: The Outcaing number is not propery programmed. What to do: Check that the Outcaing number is correct. If not, reprogram the number. Possibe Cause 2: A ine may not be avaiabe to pace a ca. What to do: If a ines are in use when the system attempts to outca, the outca does not go through. The mai system attempts to outca three times within a minimum time interva of 15 minutes between attempts. When subsequent attempts are made during a peak ine-activity period, these attempts may be deayed much onger. And if the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue end time occurs before the additiona attempts, these attempts wi not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more ines if the probem occurs frequenty. Possibe Cause 3: The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue, or the Outcaing period was ended. What to do: This is standard operation. Outcaing is performed ony during the hours specified by the subscriber s Outcaing Schedue. Outcaing wi be done ony for message received during the Outcaing period. Possibe Cause 4: Outcaing may not be turned on. What to do: Have the maibox owner verify that Outcaing is turned on. The System Manager shoud aso verify that the Outcaing priviege is assigned. 6-10

154 Troubeshooting Language Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages Possibe Cause: The system is set for Monoingua Mode. What to do: Refer to Modifying the Language Mode in Chapter 5 to determine the system s Language Mode. Cannot Understand Language Prompts Possibe Cause: Either a anguage you do not understand was inadvertenty chosen whie programming, or you do not understand the factory-set anguage. What to do: To change the anguage to one you understand, do one of the foowing: If the system is set for Monoingua Mode: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the System Manager s Maibox Password. d. Press [ 9 ] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 6 ]. e. Press the number corresponding to the desired anguage. f. Press [ 9 ]. If the system is set for Biingua Mode: a. Press [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]. b. Press [ 9 ] [ 9 ] [ # ]. c. Enter the System Manager s Maibox Password. d. Press [ 9 ] [ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. e. Press the number corresponding to the desired anguage. f. Press [ 9 ]. 6-11

155 Specifications A Capacities Maiboxes Automated Attendant Mai Capacity: Ext. 10, 60 minutes (120 messages); subscriber, 20 minutes (40 messages) Message Length: 1 second to 4 minutes Persona Greeting Length: 1 second to 4 minutes Answers on this number of rings: 2 (immediate) or 4 (deayed) Receptionist s Extension (Dia 0): Extension 10 Dia 0 Timeout: 5 seconds Dia 0 Timeout Action (day and night): Transfer to receptionist Menu Leves: 1 Menu Options: 9 aowed (5 recommended) System Capacities Without Maibox Expansion Card: 2 voice channes (ports), 10 maiboxes, 240 minutes of voice storage maximum With Maibox Expansion Card (Maximum): # of Ports # of Maiboxes Voice Storage minutes minutes minutes Tota Number of Cas Supported During Peak Usage Hour: Ca Connect Time Cas 2-port 4-port 0.5 minutes minute minutes 8 40 Ca connect time is an average for a cas to the PARTNER MAIL VS system incuding Tutor, Automated Attendant Service, Ca Answer Service, and Voice Mai Service. This information assumes a 2% probabiity of system bockage. A-1

156 Specifications Communications System The PARTNER MAIL VS system is supported on the foowing PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, PARTNER Advanced, and PARTNER 48 communications systems: In most countries: Reease 3.1 or ater of PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48, and Reease 1.0 of PARTNER Advanced Communications System In United Kingdom: Reease 2.0 or ater of PARTNER Pus and PARTNER 48 Languages Supported U.S. Engish United Kingdom Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Defaut Mode:Monoingua Defaut Languages: Monoingua Mode: U.S. Engish Biingua Mode: U.S. Engish (primary)/latin American Spanish (secondary) Dimensions PARTNER MAIL VS: 11 (D) x 17 (H) x 1.5 (W) or 27.9 x and Weights 43.2 x 3.8 cm 4.3 bs or 2.0 kgs (approx.) Maibox Exp. Card: 3.4 (D) x 2.1 (H) x 0.2 (W) or 8.6 x 5.3 x 0.5 cm.07 bs or 32 grams Eectrica Specifications 15 Watts (52 BTU/hour) during norma and maximum power consumption Maximum current 0.13 Amps Battery backup compatibe Processors microprocessor, 256Kbytes RAM, 512Kbytes ROM Specifications Voice encoding method: Reguar Puse Excitation Long Term Prediction (RPE LTP) Linear Predictive Coder Digita Signa Processor (DSP), 16 bit A-2

157 Specifications Environmenta Requirements Contro Unit Mount on a wa at east 2 feet (0.6 meters) from the foor (wa mounting required) Locate within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the network interface jacks and a propery grounded eectrica outet not controed by switch, using suppied 7-foot (2.1 meter) cords Mount the Expansion Carrier at east 6 (15.2 cm) and not more than 24 (61 cm) away from the Primary Carrier Operating temperature 32 to +104 F (0 to +40 C), not in direct sunight Humidity 15%-90%, noncondensing For proper ventiation and easy repacement of modues, provide at east 6 (15.2cm) cearance at the top and sides and 2 feet (0.6 meters) at the front and bottom of the contro unit Locate in an area free of excess moisture, corrosive gases, dust and chemicas Eectrica U.S. and Canada: VAC, Hz, 3-prong outet Requirements separate ground, separatey fused at 15 Amps: Other countries: VAC, Hz, fused at 10 Amps Outet must not be controed by an on/off switch Grounding to compy with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459: An insuated grounding conductor that is not smaer in size and equivaent in insuation materia and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit suppy conductors, except that it is green with or without one or more yeow stripes, is to be instaed as part of the circuit that suppies the product or system. The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at service equipment. The attachment-pug receptaces in the vicinity of the product or system are a to be of a grounding type, and the grounding conductors serving these receptaces are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment. Safety U.S.: Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Requirements Canada: Meets CSA C22.2, 225 A-3

158 Specifications Government U.S.: FCC Part 68 Approvas and FCC registration number (U.S.): AS5 USA KF-E Loca Phone FCC Part 15 Cass A Company REN (outside ine jack): 0.9A per ine jack Information Jack type: RJ11C Loop start ines Canada: IC CP01, Issue 7 IC registration number (Canada): A IC CS03, Issues 6&7 Load Number = 7 Loop start ines A-4

159 FCC Information B Federa Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to compy with the imits for a Cass A digita device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rues. These imits are designed to provide reasonabe protection against harmfu interference when the equipment is operated in a commercia environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not instaed and used in accordance with the instruction manuas, may cause harmfu interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residentia area is ikey to cause harmfu interference, in which case the user wi have to correct the interference at his or her own expense. NOTE: References to FCC reguations are not appicabe outside of the U.S. B-1

160 FCC Information FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rues. In compiance with those rues, you are advised of the foowing: Means of Connection: Connection to the teephone network sha be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C. These USOCs must be ordered from your oca teephone company. This equipment may not be used with party ines or coin teephone ines. Notification to the Teephone Companies: Before connecting this equipment, you or your equipment suppier must notify your oca teephone company s business office of the foowing: The teephone number(s) you wi be using with this equipment. The appropriate registration number and ringer equivaence number (REN), which can be found on the right hand side of the primary carrier. You must aso notify your oca teephone company if and when this equipment is permanenty disconnected from the ine(s). Repair Instructions: If you experience troube because your equipment is mafunctioning, the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it unti the probem has been corrected. Repairs to this equipment can ony be made by the manufacturer, its authorized agents, or by others who may be authorized by the FCC. In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, pease contact the Lucent Technoogies Technica Service Center at For warranty information, see Appendix C. Rights of the Loca Teephone Company: If this equipment causes harm to the teephone network, the oca teephone company may discontinue your service temporariy. If possibe, they wi notify you in advance. But if advance notice is not practica, you wi be notified as soon as possibe. You wi aso be advised of your right to fie a compaint with the FCC. Your oca teephone company may make changes in its faciities, equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment. If they do, you wi be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted teephone service. B-2

161 FCC Information IC Notification and Repair Information The Industry Canada (IC) abe identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain teecommunications network protective, operationa, and safety requirements. The IC does not guarantee the equipment wi operate to the user s satisfaction. Before instaing the equipment, users shoud ensure that it is permissibe to connect it to the faciities of the oca teecommunications company. The equipment must aso be instaed using an acceptabe method of connection. In some cases, the company s inside wiring for singe-ine individua service may be extended by means of a certified connector assemby (teephone extension cord). The customer shoud be aware that compiance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment shoud be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance faciity designated by the suppier. Any repairs or aterations made by the user to this equipment, or any equipment mafunctions, may give the teecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users shoud ensure for their own protection that the eectrica ground connections of the power utiity, teephone ines, and interna metaic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particuary important in rura areas. CAUTION: Users shoud not attempt to make such connections themseves, but shoud contact the appropriate eectrica inspection authority or eectrician, as appropriate. To prevent overoading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each termina device denotes the percentage of the tota oad to be connected to a teephone oop used by the device. The termination on a oop may consist of any combination of devices subject ony to the requirement that the tota of the Load Numbers of a the devices does not exceed 100. C Certification No.: A CSA Certification No.: LR Load No.: 7 B-3

162 FCC Information Renseignements sur a notification du ministére des Communications du Canada et a réparation L étiquette du Ministère des Communications du Canada identifie e matérie homoogué. Cette étiquette certifie que e matérie est conforme à certaines normes de protection, d expoitation et de sécurité des réseaux de téécommunications. Le Ministère n assure toutefois pas que e matérie fonctionnera à a satisfaction de utiisateur. Avant d instaer ce matérie, utiisateur doit s assurer qu i est permis de e raccorder aux instaations de entreprise ocae de téécommunication. Le matérie doit égaement être instaé en suivant une méthode acceptée de raccordement. Dans certains cas, es fis intérieurs de enterprise utiisés pour un service individue à igne unique peuvent être proongés au moyen d un dispositif homoogué de raccordement (cordon proongateur tééphonique interne). L abonné ne doit pas oubier qu i est possibe que a conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus n empêchent pas a dégradation du service dans certaines situations. Actueement, es entreprises de téécommunication ne permettent pas que on raccorde eur matérie à des jacks d abonné, sauf dans es cas précis prévus pas es tarifs particuiers de ces entreprises. Les réparations de matérie homoogué doivent être effectuées par un centre d entretien canadien autorisé désigné par e foumisseur. La compagnie de téécommunications peut demander à utiisateur de débrancher un apparei à a suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par utiisateur ou à cause de mauvais fonctionnement. Pour sa propre protection, utiisateur doit s assurer que tous es fis de mise à a terre de a source d énergie éectrique, des ignes tééphoniques et des canaisations d eau métaiques, s i y en a, sont raccordés ensembe. Cette précaution est particuiérement importante dans es régions ruraes. AVERTISSEMENT: L utiisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements ui-même; i doit avoir racours à un service d inspection des instaations éectriques, ou à un éectricien, seon e cas. L indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif termina indique, pour éviter toute surcharge, e pourcentage de a charge totae qui peut être raccordée a un circuit tééphonique boucié utiisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit boucé peut être constituée de n importe quee combinaison de dispositifs, pourvu que a somme des indices de charge de ensembe des dispositifs ne dépasse pas 100. No d homoagation: A No de certification CSA: LR L indice de charge: 7 B-4

163 Warranty Information C Repair Information Outside the continenta U.S., contact your Lucent Technoogies Representative or oca Authorized Deaer for warranty and repair information appicabe to your system. In-Warranty Repairs If you purchased or eased your system directy from Lucent Technoogies, Lucent Technoogies wi repair it free of charge during the one-year warranty period. Simpy ca the Lucent Technoogies Technica Service Center and ask for service. Business-Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the contro unit and system phones. Business-Day service is performed during norma business hours. However, if you need 24-hour service protection during the warranty period on the contro unit in case there is a major system faiure, you can purchase an Around-the-Cock service contract from your oca Lucent Technoogies saes office. (Around-the-Cock service is not avaiabe for phones.) If you purchased or eased your system through a Lucent Technoogies Authorized Deaer, contact your deaer for repairs. C-1

164 Warranty Information Post-Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from Lucent Technoogies and you have a postwarranty service contact, Lucent Technoogies service is provided under the terms of that contract. To significanty reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period, you can purchase a post-warranty service contract from Lucent Technoogies. If you do not have a contract, Lucent Technoogies service is provided on a time-andmaterias basis by caing the Lucent Technoogies Technica Service Center. A contract provides you, within the appicabe coverage period and response times, service cas with no charge for parts and abor on covered repairs. Both Business-Day and Around-the-Cock coverages of varying engths are avaiabe. To order a post-warranty service contract, ca (in the continenta U.S. ony). If you eased your system from Lucent Technoogies, Business-Day service is incuded in your ease. To upgrade to Around-the-Cock service, ca (in the continenta U.S. ony). If you purchased or eased your system through a Lucent Technoogies Authorized Deaer, contact your deaer for repairs. C-2

165 Warranty Information Lucent Technoogies Warranty and Limitation of Liabiity Lucent Technoogies warrant you, the customer, that your system wi be in good working order on the date Lucent Technoogies or its authorized reseer deivers or instas the system, whichever is ater ( Warranty Date ). If you notify Lucent Technoogies or its Authorized Deaer within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technoogies wi without charge to you repair or repace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or repacement parts may be new or refurbished and wi be provided on an exchange basis. If Lucent Technoogies determines that your system cannot be repaired or repaced, Lucent Technoogies wi remove the system and, at your option, refund the purchase price of your system or appy the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technoogies system. If you purchased your system directy from Lucent Technoogies, Lucent Technoogies wi perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technoogies maintenance coverage you seected. A written expanation of Lucent Technoogies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technoogies by caing (in the continenta U.S. ony). If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technoogies Authorized Deaer, contact your reseer for the detais of the maintenance pan appicabe to your system. This Lucent Technoogies imited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges. Uness otherwise expressy agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technoogies, Lucent Technoogies wi not be responsibe under this imited warranty for damages resuting from: Faiure to foow Lucent Technoogies instaation, operation, or maintenance instructions; Unauthorized system modification, movement, or ateration; Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system; Abuse, misuse, or negigent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s contro; or Act of third parties and acts of God. C-3

166 Warranty Information LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE, IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Limitation of Liabiity Except as provided beow, the iabiity of Lucent Technoogies and its affiiates and suppiers for any caims, osses, damages, or expenses from any cause whatsoever (incuding acts or omissions of third parties), regardess of the form of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, sha not exceed the esser of: (1) the direct damages proven; or (2) the repair cost, repacement cost, icense fee, annua renta charge, or purchase price, as the case may be, of the equipment that directy gives rise to caim. Except as provided beow, Lucent Technoogies and its affiiates and suppiers sha not be iabe for any incidenta, specia, reiance, consequentia, or indirect oss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment. As used in this paragraph, consequentia damages incude, but are not imited to, the foowing: ost profits, ost revenues, and osses arising out of unauthorized use (or charges for such use) of common carrier teecommunications services or faciities accessed through or connected to the equipment. For persona injury caused by Lucent Technoogies negigence, Lucent Technoogies iabiity sha be imited to proven damages to person. No action or proceeding against Lucent Technoogies or its affiiates or suppiers may be commenced more than tweve (12) months after the cause of action accrues. THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. C-4

167 Voice Messaging System Panning Forms D This appendix contains the voice messaging system forms. We suggest you fi in a photocopy of the form you need, eaving the bank origina in the book, in case you need to make revisions in the future. These forms must be competed before the voice mai system is instaed because they serve as a reference for the person who instas and programs the system. It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for the voice mai system. If you change the system after instaation, you shoud update the forms that were used when the system was instaed. NOTE: Before you begin to fi out the voice mai system Panning Forms, you need a compete, current copy of the communications system Panning Forms. Sampes of these forms are contained in Appendix E. For a genera description of a the Panning Forms, see Chapter 3. Instructions for competing each form are contained on the form itsef. D-1

168 Voice Messaging System Panning Forms How To Use the Forms The foowing tabe shows what voice mai system forms shoud be competed according to your voice mai system feature seection: To Use VMS From Programming Form Main Menu, press Seect Language Mode, System Language, Primary 1 [ 1 ] and Secondary Language Assign Maiboxes to subscribers, identify Maibox 2 [ 4 ] Language and Outcaing privieges Identify Menu Definition (i.e., Direct Extension 3 [ 3 ] Transfer, Seector Code Transfer), Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer, or Annc. #. Required For Automated Attendant Service. Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in 3A [ 3 ] System or Primary Language). Required if Annc. # is assigned to a Seector Code. Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in 3B [ 3 ] Secondary Language). Required for Biingua Mode if Annc. # is assigned to a Seector Code. Script the Day Menu Prompt (in System or Primary 4 [ 3 ] Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways. Script the Day Menu Prompt (in Secondary 4A [ 3 ] Language). Required for Biingua Mode if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways. Script the Night Menu Prompt (in System or Primary 5 [ 3 ] Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways. Script the Night Menu Prompt (in Secondary 5A [ 3 ] Language). Required for Biingua Mode if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways. Assign Line Ownership (cannot be assigned to ines 6 [ 6 ] assigned Automated Attendant coverage). Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more ines. D-2

169 Form 1: Language Language Mode: Monoingua Biingua Monoingua Mode System Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specify Biingua Mode Primary Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specify Biingua Mode Secondary Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specify Genera Information Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and Secondary Languages. Aso, subscribers can record two persona greetings one in the Primary Language and another in the Secondary Language. Competing this Form Language Mode Check Biingua if the Language Mode shoud be set to Biingua. If you check Biingua, aso see beow; if not, see. Monoingua Mode System Language Check the Primary anguage desired if different from the defaut. Biingua Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the defaut. Subscribers can have a Maibox Language different from the anguages seected here. Maibox Language is specified on Form 2. Biingua Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the defaut. Programming Language To program the Language Mode, as we as the System Language in Monoingua Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages in Biingua Mode, dia [ 1 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

170 Form 2: Maibox Assignments Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Outcaing Language Assigned Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Outcaing Language Assigned 10 (26 ) (11 ) (27 ) (12 ) (28 ) (13 ) (14 ) (15 ) (16 ) (29 ) (30 ) (31 ) (32 ) (17 ) (33 ) (18 ) (34 ) (19 ) (35 ) (20 ) (36 ) (21 ) (37 ) (22 ) (23 ) (24 ) (38 ) (39 ) (40 ) (25 ) Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. The system comes with a predetermined number of maiboxes. The optiona Maibox Expansion Card doubes the capacity. Maibox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed. Maibox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. A other maiboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time. For system security, maiboxes shoud be deeted where they are not needed; for exampe, maiboxes shoud be deeted for extensions in use by auxiiary equipment (such as a fax or doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group. Guest maiboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the maibox number. Unused extension numbers incude: 1) vacant extension jacks in instaed 206 modues and 2) extensions in your DIAL pan higher than the ast extension jack in the ast instaed 206 modue. See Guest Maiboxes in Chapter 5 for more information. Maibox To assign a maibox to an extension other than the factory defaut, cross out the factory defaut and write in the extension to be used. For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an extension number from For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number from To mark an unused maibox for deetion without assigning an extension, cross out the factory defaut. Subscriber Name For every maibox in use, write the name of the maibox subscriber. Maibox Language For each maibox that requires a anguage different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1, write the name of the anguage in this space. Supported anguages are isted on Form 1. Outcaing Assigned For each maibox in use, indicate whether Outcaing is assigned. Programming Maiboxes You can change a maibox assignment by deeting an existing maibox and creating a new one. To program maiboxes, dia [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.

171 Form 3: Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Description Seector Range of Extensions Ext. # or Group # for Code for Direct Extension Seector Code Transfer, Transfer or Announcement # 1 (10 19 ) 2 (20 29 ) 3 (30 39 ) 4 (40 49 ) 5 (50 57 ) 6 7 (71 74, ) 8 9 Transfer to Maibox 10 Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. This Menu Definition appies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts. The Seector Code is the first digit diaed by the caer in response to the menu prompts. In Direct Extension Transfer, Seector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Seector Codes et caers dia extension numbers directy. In Seector Code Transfer, Seector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension, Group Caing number, (if avaiabe) or Hunt Group number to which the caer wi be transferred. Use the foowing vaues: PARTNER Pus: or PARTNER Advanced: 11 41, 71 74, or PARTNER II: 10 57, 71 74, or PARTNER 48: 10 57, 71, or Seector Code Transfer ets caers dia a singe digit to reach a singe extension or group, such as the VP of Saes at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774. Seector Code 9 ets caers transfer directy to maibox 10 (receptionist maibox) where they can eave a message. The Description and Seector Code number from this form wi be used to compete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms 4, 4A, 5, and 5A. For Announcement entries in Description, Seector Code, and Announcement # of this form wi be used to compete Forms 3A and 3B. For Direct Extension Transfer... Description Write Direct Extension Transfer. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Leave the factory defaut. Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer...Leave bank. For Seector Extension Transfer... Description the transfer. Write the name of the person or group to receive Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to transfer to the extension, announcement, or group identified in beow. Ext. #, or Group # for Seector Code Transfer...Write the extension, announcement, or group number to receive the transfer. For Announcement... Description Write Announcement. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to hear the Announcement identified in beow. Announcement # Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).

172 Form 3: Menu Definition Programming the Menu To program the menu definition, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu and seect the Day Menu. After defining the menu, the system wi prompt you to record the menu prompt. See Form 4 for the Day Menu Prompt and Form 5 for the Night Menu Prompt; for Biingua Mode, aso see Forms 4A and 5A. See Form 3A for Automated Attendant Announcement(s); for Biingua Mode, aso see Form 3B.

173 Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language Required if Seector Code Transfer is set to Announcement Announcement # : Announcement # : Genera Information Competing this Form After the Announcement pays, you can program the system to hang up or to offer caers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to transfer to an extension), or 0. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie istening to the Announcement. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. Announcements can suppy frequenty requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficienty. An Announcement can be up to four minutes ong. Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided. Recording the Announcement(s) To record the Announcement, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

174 Form 3B: Automated Attendant Announcement Secondary Language Required for Biingua Mode ony if Seector Code transfer is set to Announcement Announcement # : Announcement # : Genera Information Competing this Form After the Announcement pays, you can program the system to hang up or to offer caers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to transfer to an extension), or 0. Let caers know they can switch to the Primary Language whie istening to the Announcement. For exampe, For Engish, press * 1. Announcements can suppy frequenty requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficienty. An Announcement can be up to four minutes ong. Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided. Recording the Announcement(s) To record the Announcement, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

175 Form 4: Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways Genera Information Competing this Form The Day Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways and Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. The Day Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, Thank you for caing the Any Trave Agency. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To speak to someone in saes, press 6. If caers can can choose an Announcement, incude that information. For exampe, For directions to our office, press 4. Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca during norma business hours, incuding the instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Remain on the ine for assistance. Dia 0 for assistance. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Day Menu Prompt To record the Day Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer.

176 Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language Required for Biingua Mode ony if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways Genera Information Competing this Form The Day Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways and Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. The Day Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, Thank you for caing the Any Trave Agency. Let caers know they can switch back to the Primary Language. For exampe, For Engish, press * 1. Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca during norma business hours, incuding the instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Remain on the ine for assistance. Dia 0 for assistance. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Day Menu Prompt The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. To record the Day Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To speak to someone in saes, press 6. If caers can can choose an Announcement, incude that information. For exampe, For directions to our office, press 4. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer.

177 Form 5: Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways Genera Information The Night Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways and Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. If Seector Code 9 is eft as the defaut, the prompt shoud instruct caers to press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer. The Night Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, You have reached the Any Trave Agency. Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now and eave a message. Competing this Form Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca after norma business hours, incuding instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Dia 9 or remain on the ine to eave a message. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To eave a message for Pat, press 6. Keep in mind that there are no group maiboxes.

178 Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language Required for Biingua Mode ony if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways Genera Information The Night Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways and Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. If Seector Code 9 is eft as the defaut, the prompt shoud instruct caers to press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer. The Night Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, You have reached the Any Trave Agency. Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday. Let caers know they can switch back to the Primary Language. For exampe, For Engish, press *1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now and eave a message. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To eave a message for Pat, press 6. Keep in mind that there are no group maiboxes. Competing this Form Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca after norma business hours, incuding instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Dia 9 or remain on the ine to eave a message. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

179 Form 6: Line Ownership Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more ines Line # Teephone Number Line Owner (Subscriber Name) Maibox Genera Information Competing this Form Lines in the system are assigned either ownership or Automated Attendant Service coverage a singe ine cannot be assigned both types of coverage. Note that more than one ine may be assigned to the same maibox, but a singe ine cannot be assigned to more than one maibox. Lines that are assigned ownership typicay are used for persona ines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant Service is not used. If the company has users who need to access maiboxes when no one is around to transfer them to their maiboxes, you can set up the system as foows: Assign extension 10 as owner of the covered ines. Instruct users to press [ ] [ 7 ] when they hear the persona greeting from extension 10. See the communications system panning forms to determine ine numbers, teephone numbers, and ine owners extensions. As an aternative to VMS Line Coverage you can use Extension Line Coverage. See Chapter 5 for more information. Line # Write the number of the outside ine to be covered by the voice maibox of the ine owner. For PARTNER PLUS, specify an outside ine number from For PARTNER Advanced, specify an outside ine number from For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 specify an outside ine number from Teephone Number Write the teephone number of the outside ine to be covered. Line Owner Write the name of the person responsibe for picking up messages on this ine. This is a subscriber from Form 2, Maibox Assignments. Maibox Write the maibox number assigned to the subscriber. Programming Line Ownership To program ine ownership, dia [ 6 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

180 Communications System Panning Forms E This appendix contains sampes of the communications systems Panning Forms. These forms identify certain features of the communications system that must be programmed before the voice mai system is instaed to ensure that both systems are integrated and function appropriatey. It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for the both systems. If you change the communications system after instaation, you shoud update the forms that were used when the communications system was instaed and ensure that any corresponding voice mai system forms are updated accordingy. Sampes of the voice mai system Panning Forms are incuded in Appendix D. For a genera description of a the Panning Forms, see Chapter 3. Instructions for competing each form are contained on the form itsef. E-1

181 Communications System Panning Forms How To Use the Forms The foowing tabe shows what procedures shoud be used and to which communications systems forms they correspond in panning for voice mai system instaation and programming: To Use Compete Feature/Procedure CS Form Assign the extensions associated with the VMS Hunt Group B2 hardware to Hunt Group 7. Extensions (#505) Assign ines to Hunt Group 7 so cas can ring Group Ca B1 directy to the VMS and receive Automated Distribution (#206) Attendant Service. Identify an extension as an owner of an outside Line Coverage A, B2 ine so cas on that ine can ring directy to the Extension (#208) owner s voice maibox when Automatic VMS Cover or VMS Cover is on at owner s ext. Determine when outside cas shoud be answered VMS Hunt Deay A by the Automated Attendant Service of the VMS (#506) (i.e., immediate or deayed ca handing). Determine when outside cas shoud ring the VMS VMS Hunt Schedue A Hunt Group (aways, day ony, or night ony) (#507) depending on the status of the Night Service Button at ext. 10. Determine whether an extension s unanswered Automatic VMS B2 intercom and transferred cas and outside cas on Cover (#310) ines assigned ownership are automaticay covered by the VMS. Specify the number of times intercom and VMS Cover Rings A transferred cas or outside cas on ines assigned (#117) ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the VMS. Identify the extension to which a ca transferred by Transfer Return B1 the VMS shoud be routed if the destination Extension (#306) extension does not answer and does not have voice mai coverage active. (The transfer return extension for the VMS is typicay ext. 10). E-2

182 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page 2. PAGE 1 of 2 1. Customer Biing Name 6. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first): 2. Instaation Address 3. Contact Name System Lines Phone ( ) Person to be Trained Phone Aternate Trainee s Name Phone ( ) ( ) Sod by [] Lucent Technoogies Saes Force Saesperson s Name Phone Line Jack No [] Deaer: ( ) Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires (ist persona and dedicated ines ast) Write R if Rotary (Dia Puse) Line {#201} Line Coverage You can seect one per ine AA 1 VMS- 2 AA {#607} {#206} Ony one of these types per system Hunt 3 Group (write no.) {#206} VMS- 4 Mai {#206} or {#208} Write User's Name for Persona or Owned Line or Identify Equipment for Dedicated Line Check if Caer ID Service Identify other Loca Teephone Company Subscription Services (e.g., Repeat Ca) 1. Check if desired. Aso see Form B1, AA Extension {#607} coumn. 2. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 9, and Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn. 3. Write group number (1 6) covering this ine. Aso see Form B2, Hunt Group Extensions {#505} Check desired ine for #206 or enter ine owner's extension number for #208. Aso see Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn.

183 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs nnovations Form A: System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see pages 3 and 4. PAGE 2 of System Settings. Write response on ine for each item. Receptionist answers cas during business hours? Write Yes or No. Number of Lines {#104} By defaut, 3 ines per PARTNER ACS processor modue, 2 ines per 206 modue and 4 ines per 400 modue are assigned to each extension. Write number if different from defaut. Transfer Return Rings {#105} By defaut, a transferred ca rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from defaut. Outside Conference Denia {#109} By defaut, a conference ca can incude 2 outside parties. Write No if 2 outside parties are not aowed. VMS Cover Rings {#117} By defaut, a ca rings 3 times before going to the user s maibox. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. Ring on Transfer {#119} By defaut, the caer hears ringing when the ca is transferred. Write NA if Music on Hod or sience is desired. To Ca Prefix {#402} By defaut, 0 or 1 must be diaed before the area code for a ong distance ca. Write No if 0 or 1 is not required. System Password {#403} By defaut, no password is programmed to override diaing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is desired. Star Code Dia Deay {#410} By defaut, the system inserts a 0 second deay after a vaid Centra Office star code when it autodias. Write number (1 5) of seconds if a onger deay is desired or NO if this feature shoud not be active. Music on Hod {#602} By defaut, the Music on Hod jack on the processor modue is active. Write No if the jack is deactivated. Line Coverage. If VMS-AA is checked on Form A, Item 7, specify the foowing: VMS Hunt Deay {#506} By defaut, VMS answers cas after 2 rings. Write De if cas ring 4 times before VMS answers. VMS Hunt Schedue {#507} By defaut, VMS is on a the time. Check if Day ony or Night ony is desired: Day ony Night ony 10. Auxiiary Equipment (System). Check if appicabe: Battery Backup Caer ID Devices Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones Magic on Hod (Music on Hod {#602} must be active.) Uninterruptibe Power Suppy SMDR. If checked, specify the foowing if appropriate: SMDR Record Type {#608} By defaut, a cas are incuded on ca reports. Write Out if ony outgoing cas are reported. SMDR Output Format {#610} By defaut, up to 15 digits are printed for diaed numbers in the Number fied of the ca report. Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired. PARTNER Contact Cosure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) beow to specify Operation Type for each Contact Cosure as appropriate: OperationType {#613} 1 = 1 second on 2 = 3 seconds on ( ) 3 = 5 seconds on 4 = Togge Contact Contact Cosure 1 Cosure 1 Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write Active if Automatic System Programming Backup {#123} is desired. 11. Notes: Write any additiona information that you want to communicate to the instaer. 12. Instaation Date 13. Order Nos. 14. Saes Support Representative s Name Teephone No.

184 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 1 of 3 Ext. Jack No Write Name/Description Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension Write in Other Equipment IMPORTANT: A system dispay phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typicay is the receptionist's extension. Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typicay the System Manager's extension). 1. If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. 3. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca Waiting is desired, check next coumn. 4. Must be standard phone. If immediate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Hotine {#311}. 5. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oudspeaker paging system in next coumn Write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify Group Assignments, VMS Ony. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, asign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines see Lines Not Assigned on Form B2. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form. Write 1, 2, or B (for Both) to identify which Contact Cosure the extension can activate.

185 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 2 of 3 Ext. Jack No Write Name/Description dentify Teephone Attached to this Extension Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension Write Transfer Write in Return Other Ext. No. Equipment {#306} If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify 2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. Group Assignments, VMS OnIy. 3. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca Waiting is desired, check next coumn. 7. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, assign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. 4. Must be standard phone. If immediate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that 8. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines see prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Lines Not Assigned on Form B2. Hotine {#311}. 9. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form. 5. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oud- 10. Write 1, 2, or B (for Both) to identify which Contact Cosure the extension can activate. speaker paging system in next coumn.

186 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Ext. Jack No Form B1: System Extensions May be used if Ext. Name Dispay is checked on Form B1, page 1 of 3 or page 2 of 3. Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Dispayed See Tabe at Right Character Codes Letters: A = 21 B = 22 C = 23 D = 31 E = 32 F = 33 G = 41 H = 42 N = 62 O = 63 P = 71 Q = 72 R = 73 S = 74 T = 81 U = 82 I = 43 V = 83 J = 51 W = 91 K = 52 L = 53 X = 92 Y = 93 M = 61 Z = 94 Numbers: bank = 11 0 = 00 5 = 50 1 = 10 6 = 60 2 = 20 7 = 70 3 = 30 8 = 80 4 = 40 9 = 90 PAGE 3 of 3 Note: Ony 12 characters dispay on MLS-mode phones.

187 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B2: Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and 7. PAGE 1 of Identify Extension Settings if Different than Defaut Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option If Different than Defaut Identify Restrictions/Permissions If Different than Defauts Identify Group Assignments Write ine numbers in each coumn to show desired Line Ringing options Write ine numbers for Line Access Restriction {#302} No Restriction Lines Outgoing Incoming Immediate Deayed No Ring No Access NR E NA A NA A NA NA Not Assigned ony ony NA NA NA Write S for Spanish or F for French. 6. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines to 7. extensions. Write IN for inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a 8. outgoing cas on a ines. 9. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. Write group number (1 4). Assignments Write group number (1 4). If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, = Defaut put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. A = Assigned or Active Write group number (1 6). E = Engish Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1. NA = Not Assigned or Not Active NA NR = No Restriction {CTP} = Centraized Teephone Programming

188 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B2: Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and 7. PAGE 2 of Identify Extension Settings If Different than Defaut E NA A NA A NA NA Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option If Different than Defaut Write ine numbers in each coumn to show desired Line Ringing options Immediate Deayed Write S for Spanish or F for French. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines to extensions. Write IN for Inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a outgoing cas on a ines. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. No Ring Lines 2 Not Assigned Identify Restrictions/Permissions If Different than Defauts Write ine numbers for Line Access Restriction {#302} Outgoing ony No Restriction Incoming ony No Access NR 6. Write group number (1 4). 7. Write group number (1 4). If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. 8. Write group number (1 6). 9. Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1. Identify Group Assignments NA NA NA NA Assignments = Defaut A = Assigned or Active E = Engish NA = Not Assigned or Not Active NR = No Restriction {CTP} = Centraized Teephone Programming

189 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) CF-XX XX 2,4 Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park 1. Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX Conference Drop (F 06) Drop Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 CC2 2. Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod 3. Fax Management (I XX) 2 FAX-XX Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) GCa-g Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g 4. Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Ext-XX Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 MsgOn-XX Reca (F 03) Reca 5. Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 1 of 8 Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

190 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form C2: Intercom Autodiaer PAGE 2 of 8 Make as many copies as you need. Extension 10, Extension 11, or both can have an Intercom Autodiaer. For additiona instructions, see page 9. Tempate Instructions The numbers in the ower right corner for each button represent the defaut extension assignments. If you change them, write in the new assignments. If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signa (ExtVS-XX), or Manua Signa Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signa (MSVS-XX) If desired, write in user name for this extension SAMPLE Extensions programmed as shown (circe choices): 10 11

191 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR PARTNER-18D ony Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Pickup-XX Drop CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 MsgOn-XX Reca (F 03) Reca Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 3 of 8 Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

192 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. PAGE 4 of 8 Tempate Instructions f desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. SAMPLE Do Not Disturb (F 01) F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 1 Background Music (F 19) 1 DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 1,2 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX Conference Drop (F 06) Drop Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 1 CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 1 CC2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 1 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 1 Last Number Redia (F 05) ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 1 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 4 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 4 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 1 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox Button with ights is recommended, but not required. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the extension number.

193 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Intercom Form C5: MLS-34D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. SAMPLE Intercom Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Night Service Button {#503} Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) NightSvc OCR Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Message Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Pickup-XX Drop CC1 CC2 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F= Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 5 of 8 Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

194 Form C6: MLS-18D Phone PAGE 6 of 8 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc OCR Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 Background Music (F 19) 2 Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) Park 3 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Pickup-XX Drop CC1 CC2 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) MS-XX 2 5. Message Light Off (F 10 XX) MsgOff-XX 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

195 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music 1. Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 CC2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA 3. Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLP ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 7 of 8 Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

196 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C8: MLS-6 Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. SAMPLE Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 1 ACE Background Music (F 19) 1 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 1,2 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX ) 3 Park Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX Conference Drop (F 06) Drop Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 1 CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 1 CC2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod Fax Management (I XX) 1 FAX-XX Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) GCa-g Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 1 Ext-XX Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 1 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 4 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 4 MsgOn-XX Reca (F 03) Reca Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage Station Lock (F 21) 1 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox PAGE 8 of 8 F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension Button with ights is recommended, but not required. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the extension number.

197 Form D: Number Lists PAGE 1 of 3 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Required if Form B2 identifies Disaowed or Aowed List Assignments. For additiona instructions, see page 14. Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404} Required ony if Disaowed List Assignment {#405} is specified on Form B2. Write the teephone numbers that users are prevented from diaing. List 1 List 4 List 2 List 3 List 5 List 6 List 7 List 8 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407} Required ony if Aowed List Assignment {#408} is specified on Form B2. Write the teephone numbers that users can dia regardess of assigned restrictions. List 1 List 4 List 2 List 3 List 5 List 6 List 7 List 8 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teepnone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number Teephone Number can be up to 12 characters, incuding 0-9, *, and #. Write! for widcard (press Hod to program).

198 Form D: Number Lists PAGE 2 of 3 Lucent Technoogies Be abs Innovations Required if Form B1 identifies Externa Hotines. For additiona instructions, see page 15. Emergency Phone Number List {#406} Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be diaed from any phone that has access to an outside ine regardess of assigned restrictions. Entry Teephone Number 1 Person/Pace Teephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9). 2. Teephone Number can be up to 28 characters, incuding 0-9, *, #, and specia diaing functions. You can have more than 10 Externa Hotines. Externa Hotine {#311} Required if Externa Hotine {#311} is checked on Form B1. Write Extension Jack number specified on Form B1, and the corresponding teephone number to be assigned to Persona Speed Dia Code 80 for that extension. Ext.Jack Teephone Number 2 NOTE: An Externa Hotine phone is a standard phone that dias the specified teephone number when the handset is ifted.

199 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form D: Number Lists Required ony if Forced Account Code Verification is desired. For additiona instructions, see page 15. PAGE 3 of 3 Forced Account Code List {#409} Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits) 1 Write Description Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits) 1 Write Description Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits) 1 Write Description Vaid entries are 0-9; write! for widcard (press Hod to program).

200 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form E: System Speed Dia Numbers Optiona for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page 16. To Dia: On system phones, press [ Feature ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [ # ] + 3-digit code whie receiving intercom dia tone. PAGE 1 of 1 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number 2 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number 2 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number You can dia System Speed Dia numbers that are marked with at any time, regardess of diaing restrictions paced on your extension. System Speed Dia numbers are programmed by the System Manager (report probems and suggested revisions to your System Manager). 2 Teephone number can be up to 28 digits, incuding 0-9,, # and specia diaing functions (see page 16 of instructions for detaied information).

201 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page 2. PAGE 1 of 3 1. Customer Biing Name Instaation Address Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system ony): No Yes If yes, ca oca teephone company MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA MF-E 3. Contact Name Phone 7. ( ) 4. Person to be Trained Phone Aternate Trainee s Name Phone ( ) ( ) 5. Sod by [] Lucent Technoogies Saes Force Saesperson s Name Phone [] Deaer: ( ) 8. System Lines Line Jack No Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires (ist persona and dedicated ines ast) Write R if Rotary (Dia Puse) Line {#201} Hybrid Mode Ony: Write auxiiary poo 881, 882, 883 or No Poo {#207} Line Coverage You can seect one per ine AA 1 DXD 2 VMS- 3 ASA 4 AA {#607} {#205} {#206} {#204} Ony one of these types per system Hunt 5 Group (Write no.) {#206} VMS- 6 Mai {#206} or {#208} Write 7 Ext. No for Ca Cover {#208} Features Customer is most interested in (most important first): Write User s Name for Persona or Owned Line or Identify Equipment for Dedicated Line 1. Check if desired. Aso see Form B1, AA Extension {#607} coumn. 5. Write group number (1 6) covering this ine. Aso see Form B2, Hunt Group Extensions {#505} Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 DXD, and Form C, Direct Extension Dia Button {#113}. 6. Check desired ine for #206 or enter ine owner s extension number for #208. Aso see Form B1, PARTNER 3. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 VMS-AA, and Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn. coumn. 7. Write extension number of ine owner eigibe for Ca Coverage. Aso write ine owner s name in next 4. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 ASA, and Form C, Automatic System Answer Button {#111}. coumn. Check if Caer ID Service Identify other Loca Teephone Company Subscription Services (e.g., Repeat Ca)

202 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page 3. PAGE 2 of 3 9. System Settings. Write response on ine for each item. VMS-AA: If VMS-AA is checked, specify the foowing: Receptionist answers cas during business hours? Write Yes or No. Number of Lines {#104} By defaut, 2 ines per 206 modue and 4 ines per 400 modue are assigned to each extension (or to poo 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write number if different from defaut. Transfer Return Rings {#105} By defaut, a transferred ca rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from defaut. Outside Conference Denia {#109} By defaut, a conference ca can incude 2 outside parties. Write No if 2 outside parties are not aowed. Ca Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II ony) By defaut, a covered ca rings 2 times before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. VMS Cover Rings {#117} By defaut, a ca rings 3 times before going to the user s maibox. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. Ring on Transfer {#119} By defaut, the caer hears ringing when the ca is transferred. Write NA if music on hod or sience is desired. To Ca Prefix {#402} By defaut, 0 or 1 must be diaed before the area code for a ong distance ca. Write No if 0 or 1 is not required. System Password {#403} By defaut, no password is programmed to override diaing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is desired. Music on Hod {#602} By defaut, the Music on Hod jack on the processor modue is active. Write No if the jack is deactivated. 10. Line Coverage. Compete items based on Line Coverage seection on Form A, Item 8. DXD: (PARTNER II system ony) If DXD is checked, specify the foowing: Direct Extension Dia Deay {#112} By defaut, a ca rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from defaut. Direct Extension Dia Record/Payback (I 892) message of up to 20 seconds that caer hears when ca is answered with the Direct Extension Dia feature. Write message beow and record from extension 10 or 11: VMS Hunt Deay {#506} By defaut, VMS answers cas after 2 rings. Write De if cas ring 4 times before VMS answers. VMS Hunt Schedue {#507} By defaut, VMS is on a the time. Check if Day ony or Night ony is desired: Day ony Night ony ASA: (PARTNER II system ony) If ASA is checked, specify the foowing: Automatic System Answer Deay {#110} By defaut, a ca rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from defaut. Automatic System Answer Mode {#121} By defaut, ASA cas are put on hod after the greeting pays. Check if cas shoud continue to ring or be disconnected: Ring Disconnect ASA Record/Payback (I 891) message of up to 10 seconds that caer hears when the ca is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write message beow and record from extension 10 or 11:

203 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page 4. PAGE 3 of Auxiiary Equipment (System). Check if appicabe: [] Battery Backup [] Caer ID Devices [] Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones [] Magic on Hod (Music on Hod {#602} must be active.) [] [] Uninterruptibe Power Suppy SMDR If checked, specify the foowing if appropriate: SMDR Record Type (#608) By defaut, a cas are incuded on ca reports. Write Out if ony outgoing cas are reported. SMDR Output Format (#610) By defaut, up to 15 digits are printed for diaed numbers in the Number fied of the ca report. Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired. SMDR Tak Time (#611) (PARTNER II ony) By defaut, a Tak fied is not incuded on the ca report. Write Active if the Tak fied is desired. 12. Notes: Write any additiona information that you want to communicate to the instaer. 13. Instaation Date 14.Order Nos. 15. Saes Support Representative s Name Teephone No.

204 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For-additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 1 of 4 Ext. Jack No Write Name/Description Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension IMPORTANT: A system dispay phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typicay is the receptionist's extension. Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typicay the System Manager's extension). 1. If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 4 2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. 3. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca Waiting is desired, check next coumn. 4. Must be standard phone. If immedate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Hotine {#311}. 5. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oudspeaker paging system in next coumn Write in Other Equipment Write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify Group Assignments, VMS Ony. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, assign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines-see Lines/Poos Not Assigned on Form B2. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.

205 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57. For additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 2 of 4 Ext. Jack No Write Name/Description Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension 1. If checked, see Form B1, Page 4 of 4 2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. 3. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca Waiting is desired, check next coumn. 4. Must be standard phone. If immediate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Hotine {#311}. 5. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oudspeaker paging system in next coumn Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension Write in Other Equipment Write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify Group Assignments, VMS Ony. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, assign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines-see Lines/Poos Not Assigned on Form B2. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.

206 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions May be used if Ext. Name Dispay is checked on Form B1, Page 1 of 4. PAGE 3 of 4 Ext. Jack No Note: Ony 12 characters dispay on MLS-mode phones. Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Dispayed See Tabe at Right Character Codes Letters: A = 21 N = 62 B = 22 0 = 63 C = 23 P = 71 D = 31 Q = 72 E = 32 R = 73 F = 33 S = 74 G = 41 T = 81 H = 42 U = 82 I = 43 V = 83 J = 51 W = 91 K = 52 X = 92 L = 53 Y = 93 M = 61 Z = 94 Numbers: bank = 11 0 = 00 5 = 50 1 = 10 6 = 60 2 = 20 7 = 70 3 = 30 8 = 80 4 = 40 9 = 90

207 Form B1: System Extensions PAGE 4 of 4 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations May be used if Ext. Name Dispay is checked on Form B1, Page 2 of 4. Ext. Jack No Note: Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Dispayed See Tabe at Right Ony 12 characters dispay on MLS-mode phones. Character Codes Letters: A = 21 N = 62 B = 22 O = 63 C = 23 P = 71 D = 31 Q = 72 E = 32 R = 73 F = 33 S = 74 G = 41 T = 81 H = 42 U = 82 I = 43 V = 83 J = 51 W = 91 K = 52 X = 92 L = 53 Y = 93 M = 61 Z = 94 Numbers: bank = 11 0 = 00 5 = 50 1 = 10 6 = 60 2 = 20 7 = 70 3 = 30 8 = 80 4 = 40 9 = 90

208 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B2: Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and 7. PAGE 1 of Identify Extension Settings if Different than Defaut Hybrid Mode Ony: Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option If Different than Defaut Write ine numbers or poo access codes in each coumn to show desired Line Ringing options Identify Restrictions/Permissions If Different than Defauts Write ine numbers or poo access codes for Line Access Restriction {#302} or Poo Access Restriction {#315} No Restriction Identify Group Assignments NA NA NA Immediate No Ring Lines/Poos 3 Outgoing Incoming ines Deayed No Access NR E NA A NA A NA NA P NA poos Not Assigned ony ony NA K ALL Write S for Spanish or F for French. 5. In Hybrid Mode ony, write K for Key extension. Extension 10 aways operates 6. as a Key extension. 7. In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines 8. to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Poo Extension Assignment {#314} to remove poos from or assign poos to extensions. 9. Write IN for Inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a 10. outgoing cas on a ines. Write ist number (1 4). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Assignments Write ist number (1 4). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. = Write group number (1 4). A = Write group number (1 4). If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, E = put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. NA = Write group number (1 6). NR = Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1. P = {CTP} = Defaut Assigned or Active Engish Not Assigned or Not Active No Restriction Pooed Centraized Teephone Programming

209 Form B2: Customized Extension Setting PAGE 2 of 2 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option Identify Restrictions/Permissions Identify if Different than Defaut If Different than Defaut If Different than Defauts Group Assignments Hybrid Mode Ony: Write ine numbers or poo access codes Write ine numbers or poo access codes in each for Line Access Restriction {#302} or coumn to show desired Line Ringing options Poo Access Restriction {#315} No Restriction Immediate No Ring Lines/Poos 3 Outgoing Incoming No Access NR Deayed ines poos Not Assigned ony ony E NA A NA A NA NA P NA NA NA NA NA 1. Write S for Spanish or F for French In Hybrid Mode ony, write K for Key extension In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Poo Extension Assignment {#314} to 8. remove poos from or assign poos to extensions. 4. Write IN for Inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a 9. outgoing cas on a ines. 10. Write (1 4) number (1 4). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Write ist number (1 4). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. Write group number (1 4). Write group number (1 4), If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. Write group number (1 6). Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1. Assignments = Defaut A = Assigned or Active E = Engish NA = Not Assigned or Not Active NR = No Restriction P = Pooed {CTP} = Centraized Teephone Programming

210 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone PAGE 1 of 8 Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. SAMPLE Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Night Service Button {#503} Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 Background Music (F 19) 2 Backup Faiure Aarm (F 58) 2 NightSvc OCR Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Backup Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Park Pickup-XX Conference Drop (F 06) Drop Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 CC1 3. Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Ext-XX Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) MsgOn-XX Reca SNR Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PARTNER II system ony. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

211 Form C2: Intercom Autodiaer PAGE 2 of 8 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations For additiona instructions, see page 9. PARTNER II ony Tempate Instructions If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signa (ExtVS-XX), or Manua Signa Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signa (MSVS-XX) If desired, write in user name for this extension SAMPLE Extensions programmed as shown (circe choices): 10 11

212 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Form C3: PARTNER-18 Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE PARTNER-18D ony Night Service Button {#503} Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 Background Music (F 19) 2 Backup Faiure Aarm (F 58) 2 Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) Ca Park (I XX) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41 ) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I * 7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) NightSvc OCR Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Backup 2,4CF-XX XX Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 3 of 8 PARTNER II system ony. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

213 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. SAMPLE Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) DND Priv VMSCover VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 1 ACE Background Music (F 19) 1 Music Ca Coverage (F 20 XX XX) 1,2,3 Cover-XX XX Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 1,3 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX ) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 1 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 1 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 1 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 1 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Park Pickup-XX Drop DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox PAGE 4 of 8 F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Button with ights is recommended, but not required. PARTNER II system ony. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the extension number.

214 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Intercom Form C5: MLS-34D Phone PAGE 5 of 8 Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Intercom Night Service Button {#503} Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 Background Music (F 19) 2 NightSvc OCR Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music 1. PARTNER Backup Faiure Aarm (F 58) 2 Backup II system ony. Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX 2. Requires Ca Park (I XX) 4 Park Auto Dia Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX button for each Conference Drop (F 06) Drop extension. Contact Cosure 1 (F 41 ) 2 CC1 3. Button with ights is Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA recommended, but Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI not required. Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod 4. Extension Fax Management (I XX) 2 FAX-XX number can be programmed Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) GCa-g Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g as Auto Dia button. Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g 5. You can Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Ext-XX program the Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR origination extension Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk ony or both Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) the MS-XX origination Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX and Message Light On (F 09 XX) destination MsgOn-XX extension. Reca (F 03) Reca 6. You can Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR program the SimutaneousPaging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension extension number.

215 Form C6: MLS-18 Phone PAGE 6 of 8 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, it poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Backup Faiure Aarm (F 58) 2 Backup Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PARTNER II system ony. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

216 Form C7: MLS-12 Phone PAGE 7 of 8 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc 1 Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Backup Faiure Aarm (F 58) 2 Backup Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PARTNER II system ony. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

217 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovation Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, poo access code, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Poo Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Ext. * For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode ony, if poo 880 is assigned, these two buttons are associated with this poo. Form C8: MLS-6 Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see page 8. SAMPLE Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 1 Background Music (F 19) 1 DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Ca Coverage (F 20 XX XX) 1,2,3 Cover-XX XX Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 1,3 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX ) 4 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Park Pickup-XX Drop Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 1 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 1 Ext-XX Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 1 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 1 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox PAGE 8 of 8 F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Button with ights is recommended, but not required. PARTNER II system ony. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the extension number.

218 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form D: Number Lists PAGE 1 of 2 Required if Form B1 identifies Externa Hotines, or if Form B2 identifies Disaowed or Aowed List Assignments. For additiona instructions, see pages 14 and Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404} Required ony if Disaowed List Assignment {#405} is specified on Form B2. Write the teephone numbers that users are prevented from diaing. List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 Entry Teephone Number1 Entry Teephone NUmber1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407} Required ony if Aowed List Assignment {#408} is specified on Form B2. Write the teephone numbers that users can dia regardess of assigned restrictions. List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number 1 Entry Teephone Number Teephone Number can be up to 12 characters, incuding 0-9, *, and #. Write! for widcard (press Hod to program). 2. Teephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9). 3. Teephone Number can be up to 28 characters, incuding 0-9, *, #, and specia diaing functions. You can have more than 10 Externa Hotines Emergency Phone Number List {#406} Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be diaed from any phone that has access to an outside ine regardess of assigned restrictions. Entry Teephone Number 2 Person/Pace Externa Hotine {#311} Required if Externa Hotine {#311} is checked on Form B1. Write Extension Jack number specified on Form B1, and the corresponding teephone number to be assigned to Persona Speed Dia Code 80 for that extension. Ext.Jack Teephone Number 3 NOTE: An Externa Hotine phone is a phone that dias the specified teephone number when the handset is ifted.

219 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form D: Number Lists Required ony if Forced Account Code Verification is desired. For additiona instructions, see page 15. PAGE 2 of 2 Forced Account Code List {#409} Entry Account Code (up tp 6 digits) 1 Write Description Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits) 1 Write Description Entry Account Code (up to 6 digits) 1 Write Description Vaid entries are 0-9; write! for widcard (press Hod to program).

220 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form E: System Speed Dia Number Optiona for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page 16. To Dia: On system phones, press [ Feat ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [ # ] + 3-digit code whie receiving intercom dia tone. PAGE 1 of 1 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number 2 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number 2 Code Name/Company 1 Teephone Number You can dia System Speed Dia numbers that are marked with at any time, regardess of diaing restrictions paced on 2 Teephone number can be up to 28 digits, incuding 0-9,, # and specia diaing functions (see page 16 of instructions for your extension. System Speed Dia numbers are programmed by the System Manager (report probems and suggested revisions to your System Manager). detaied information)

221 Case Studies F Purpose This appendix contains two case studies based on actua customer requirements. Each case study defines the ca handing requirements of the business and expains how the panning forms for the communications system and voice messaging system were fied out. You can use these case studies to determine how customer requirements were matched to PARTNER MAIL VS system features. F-1

222 Case Studies Case Study #1 About the Customer Tennis Land is a sports center that offers tennis enthusiasts six tennis courts and a arge, we-stocked shop for purchasing a variety of tennis paraphernaia incuding racquets and tennis wear. In addition, Tennis Land offers essons and cinics from staff coaches. When the coaches are not giving essons or cinics, hosting tournaments, or traveing with the Tennis Land team in exhibition matches, they hep the saes peope in the shop. Stan Wiiams the owner, Say Parker the manager, and the coaches a have private offices. Stan purchased a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Reease 1.0 and a PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4 Voice Messaging System. He beieves that the systems features wi hep his empoyees provide better service to customers. Say is responsibe for managing the systems; she estabished these facts: The system wi have three outside ines and 8 extensions. The cerk wi have a PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10. Say s PARTNER-18D phone wi be extension 11. Stans PARTNER-18D phone wi be extension 12. The three coaches wi have PARTNER-18 phones. Two MLS-12 phones wi be in the shop. Stan s caers shoud be abe to reach him without having to be transferred by an empoyee or the PARTNER MAIL VS system, so Stan wi have a persona ine. When Stan is not avaiabe, his caers wi be sent directy to his maibox where they can eave messages. Stan prefers that customers speak with an empoyee whie the center is open, so a ines wi ring at a phones. Athough there is no receptionist, the cerk and the saespeope wi serve the receptionist function by answering cas when they can. During business hours, cas wi go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system ony when the cerk and saespeope are busy. A of Tennis Land s customers and empoyees speak Engish, so the PARTNER MAIL VS system wi be set for Monoingua Mode with U.S. Engish as the System Language. Potentia customers ca frequenty to inquire about Tennis Land s hours and ocation, as we as tournament and exhibition match schedues. Therefore, when the Automated Attendant Service answers, caers can choose to hear either an announcement that incudes Tennis Land s hours of operation and directions to the center or another detaiing current and upcoming competitions. Caers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to a saesperson wi be abe to reach the first avaiabe person in the shop. F-2

223 Case Studies The maibox at extension 10 wi be used for genera messages. Customers who receive Automated Attendant Service and stay on the ine or press 0 for assistance wi be routed to this extension, which is at the cerk s desk. Customers who ca after business hours wi have the option of eaving a message in this maibox. Stan, Say, and each coach wi have a maibox and Automatic VMS Cover. Caers wi be routed automaticay to the appropriate maibox where they can eave a message when the person they caed is not avaiabe. Stan, Say, and each coach wi aso have Outcaing privieges so that when they are moving around the cub during tournaments or traveing with the team, they can be aerted via their pagers to the arriva of messages being eft in their voice maiboxes. Stan especiay wants customers to be abe to eave messages for the coaches when they are away from their offices. This capabiity wi hep prevent missed appointments and ost income when customers ca about essons and cinics. F-3

224 Case Studies Fiing Out the Panning Forms This section expains how the System Panner for the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Reease 1.0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4 Voice Messaging System are fied out based on the facts in the Tennis Land case. For brevity, CS refers to the System Panner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system. CS Form A, Page 1 of 2 Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires: Teephone numbers in this coumn represent Tennis Land s three ines. The ast ine, Line 03, is Stan s persona ine. VMS-AA: In this coumn, checks for Lines 01, 02, and 03 indicate that unanswered cas on those ines go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system. VMS-Mai: Stan s extension number, 12, in this coumn indicates that the Line Coverage Extension (#208) feature sends unanswered cas on Line 04 directy to Stan s maibox. CS Form A, Page 2 of 2 System Settings: Receptionist answers cas during business hours? The cerk and saespeope wi serve the receptionist function; so Yes appears on this ine. Ring on Transfer (#119): NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages wi be payed whie cas are being transferred. Music on Hod (#602): The bank ine indicates that a Music on Hod device is instaed. Line Coverage: VMS Hunt Deay (#506): De (Deayed) indicates that the Automated Attendant Service acts as a backup, picking up cas after the fourth ring. A person has a chance to answer before a ca goes to the PARTNER MAIL VS system. VMS Hunt Schedue (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered cas during business hours and after hours. (This setting is the defaut.) F-4

225 Case Studies CS Form B1, Page 1 of 3 Write Name/Description: The names isted for extensions 10 though 19 in this coumn identify the extension assignments. Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension: Check in these coumns specify the type of teephone each person or ocation has. VMS in the Write Name/Description coumn and checks in the PARTNER MAIL VS coumn indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS modue is instaed in Sot 3 of the Contro Unit. The modue uses extensions 22 and 23, the ast two extensions for that sot. Write Transfer Return Ext. No.: 10 in this coumn indicates that when a ca transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered, it goes to extension 10 where the cerk can answer it. CS Form B2, Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover (#310): Check in this coumn indicate that unanswered cas to extensions 10 through 15 automaticay are covered by the Automated Attendant Service. Hunt Group Extensions 1-6 (#505): 1 in this coumn indicates that extensions 16 and 17 make up Hunt Group 1. A ca transferred to this group rings three times at the first non-busy extension. If it is not answered, it moves to the next non-busy extensions in the group, continuing unti someone answers or the caer hangs up. Hunt Group Extensions VMS Ony: coumn for extensions 22 and 23 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS modue be assigned to Hunt Group 7. CS Form C3, PARTNER-18 Phone The first Form C3 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb, Voice Mai Messages, and Voice Maibox Transfer. The Night Service button aows the user to turn Night Service on and off. When Night Service is off, the Day Menu prompt pays. When Night Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt pays. A subscriber can use the Do Not Disturb button to send caers to the genera maibox without ringing the extension first. The Voice Mai Messages button aows the user to ca Voice Mai Service with one touch. The Voice Maibox Transfer button aows the user to transfer caers directy to another subscriber s maibox without ringing the extension first. The second Form C3 indicates the buttons programmed on the PARTNER-18 phones at extensions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15: Do Not Disturb, Voice Mai Messages, and Voice Maibox Transfer. F-5

226 Case Studies CS Form C7, MLS-12 Phone Form C7 indicates that a Voice Maibox Transfer button is programmed on the MLS-12 phones at extensions 16 and 17. VMS Form 1 The defaut settings for Language Mode (Monoingua) and System Language (U.S. Engish) are used. VMS Form 2 Subscriber Name: In this coumn, the names assigned to maiboxes 10 though 15 indicate that the cerk, Say, Stan, and the coaches have maiboxes. Maiboxes 16 through 19 are marked for deetion. For system security, it is advisabe to deete unused maiboxes. Outcaing Assigned: Yes in this coumn indicates that Outcaing privieges are assigned to Say, Stan, and the coaches. VMS Form 3 Description: In this coumn, Direct Extension Transfer for Seector Code 1 indicates that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service, they can transfer to any extension (10 to 19) by entering the extension number. Shop in the Description coumn and 771 in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer, or Announcement # coumn for Seector Code 4 indicate that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service, they can press 4 to transfer to Hunt Group 1 (which is defined on CS Form B2 as extensions 16 and 17 in the shop). Announcement in the Description coumn and the numbers (1 and 2) in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer, or Announcement # coumn indicate that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements. VMS Form 3A When an unanswered ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service and the caer chooses to hear an Announcement, the caer hears one of the Announcements on Form 3A. VMS Form 4 When Night Service is off and an unanswered ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the Day Menu Prompt on Form 4. F-6

227 Case Studies VMS Form 5 When Night Service is on and an unanswered ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the Night Menu Prompt on Form 5. Post-Instaation Recommendations Stan, Say, and the coaches shoud record a persona greeting and change the factory set password for their maiboxes. Stan, Say, and the coaches shoud turn on Outcaing and enter an Outcaing number and schedue. The cerk shoud record a genera business greeting for the maibox at extension 10 and change the factory-set password for that maibox. F-7

228 Case Studies F-8

229 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations 1. Customer Biing Name Form A: System Configuration PAGE 1 of 2 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page Features Customer is most interested in (most important first): 2. Instaation Address 3. Contact Name Phone 4. Person to be Trained Phone Aternate Trainee s Name Phone ( ) 5. Sod by Lucent Technoogies Saes Force Saesperson s Name Phone 7. System Lines Line Jack No Deaer: Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires (ist persona and dedicated ines ast) Write R if Rotary (Dia Puse) Line {#201} Line Coverage You can seect one per ine 1 AA VMS- 2 AA {#607} {#206} Ony one of these types per system Hunt 3 VMS- 4 Group Mai (write no.) {#206} {#206} or {#208} Write User s Name for Persona or Owned Line or Identify Equipment for Dedicated Line Check if Caer ID Service Identify other Loca Teephone Company Subscription Services (e.g., Repeat Ca) 1. Check if desired. Aso see Form B1, AA Extension {#607} coumn. 2. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 9, and Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn. 3. Write group number (1 6) covering this ine. Aso see Form B2, Hunt Group Extensions {#505} Check desired ine for #206 or enter ine owner s extension number for #208. Aso see Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn.

230 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration PAGE 2 of 2 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see pages 3 and System Settings. Write response on ine for each item. Receptionist answers cas during business hours? Write Yes or No. Number of Lines {#104} By defaut, 3 ines per PARTNER ACS processor modue, 2 ines per 206 modue and 4 ines per 400 modue are assigned to each extension. Write number if different from defaut. Transfer Return Rings {#105} By defaut, a transferred ca rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from defaut. Outside Conference Denia {#109} By defaut, a conference ca can incude 2 outside parties. Write No if 2 outside parties are not aowed. VMS Cover Rings {#117} By defaut, a ca rings 3 times before going to the user s maibox. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. Ring on Transfer {#119} By defaut, the caer hears ringing when the ca is transferred. Write NA if Music on Hod or sience is desired. To Ca Prefix {#402} By defaut, 0 or 1 must be diaed before the area code for a ong distance ca. Write No if 0 or 1 is not required. System Password {#403} By defaut, no password is programmed to override diaing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is desired. Star Code Dia Deay {#410} By defaut, the system inserts a 0 second deay after a vaid Centra Office star code when it autodias. Write number (1 5) of seconds if a onger deay is desired or NO if this feature shoud not be active. Music on Hod {#602} By defaut, the Music on Hod jack on the processor modue is active. Write No if the jack is deactivated. Line Coverage. If VMS-AA is checked on Form A, Item 7, specify the foowing: VMS Hunt Deay {#506} By defaut, VMS answers cas after 2 rings. Write De if cas ring 4 times before VMS answers. VMS Hunt Schedue {#507} By defaut, VMS is on a the time. Check if Day ony or Night ony is desired: Day ony Night ony 10. Auxiiary Equipment (System). Check if appicabe: Battery Backup Caer ID Devices Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones Magic on Hod (Music on Hod {#602} must be active.) Uninterruptibe Power Suppy SMDR. If checked, specify the foowing if appropriate: SMDR Record Type {#608} By defaut, a cas are incuded on ca reports. Write Out if ony outgoing cas are reported. SMDR Output Format {#610} By defaut, up to 15 digits are printed for diaed numbers in the Number fied of the ca report. Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired. PARTNER Contact Cosure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) beow to specify Operation Type for each Contact Cosure as appropriate: OperationType Contact Contact {#613} Cosure 1 Cosure 1 1 = 1 second on 2 = 3 seconds on ( ) 3 = 5 seconds on 4 = Togge Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write Active if Automatic System Programming Backup {#123} is desired. 11. Notes: Write any additiona information that you want to communicate to the instaer. 12. Instaation Date 13. Order Nos. 14. Saes Support Representative s Name Teephone No.

231 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System. For additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 1 of 3 Ext. Jack No Write Name/Description Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension Write in Other Equipment IMPORTANT: A system dispay phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typicay is the receptionist s extension. Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typicay the System Manager s extension). 1. If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify 2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. Group Assignments, VMS Ony. 3. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca waiting is desired, check next coumn. 7. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, assign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. 4. Must be standard phone. If immediate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that 8. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines see prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Lines Not Assigned on Form B2. Hotine {#311}. 9. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form. 5. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oud- 10. Write 1, 2, or B (for Both) to identify which Contact Cosure the extension can activate. speaker paging system in next coumn. Write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} 10 10

232 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B2: Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and 7. PAGE 1 of Identify Extension Settings if Different than Defaut Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option If Different than Defaut Identify Restrictions/Permissions If Different than Defauts Write ine numbers in each coumn to show desired Write ine numbers for Line Access Restriction Line Ringing options {#302} Not Assigned E NA A NA A NA NA Immediate Deayed No Ring Lines 2 Write S for Spanish or F for French. 6. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines to 7. extensions. Write IN for Inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a 8. outgoing cas on a ines. 9. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. No Restriction Identify Group Assignments Outgoing Incoming No Access NR ony ony NA NA NA Write group number (1 4). Assignments Write group number (1 4). If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, = Defaut put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. A = Assigned or Active Write group number (1 6). E = Engish Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B NA NA = Not Assigned or Not Active NR = No Restriction {CTP} = Centraized Teephone Programming

233 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc SAMPLE Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} OCR 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB PARTNER-18D ony Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park 1. Requires Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX Auto Dia button for Conference Drop (F 06) Drop each Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 CC1 extension. 2. Button with Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 CC2 ights is Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA recommended, but Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI not required. Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod 3. Extension number can Fax Management (I XX) 2 FAX-XX be programmed Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) GCa-g as Auto Dia Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g button. Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g 4. You can Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) Ext-XX 2 program the origination Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR extension Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk ony or both the Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX origination Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX and destination Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 MsgOn-XX extension. Reca (F 03) Reca 5. You can Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR program the extension Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage number. Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension

234 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone PAGE 3 of 8 Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc SAMPLE Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} OCR 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB PARTNER-18D ony Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Park 1. Requires Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX Auto Dia button for Conference Drop (F 06) Drop each extension. Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 CC1 2. Button with Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 CC2 ights is Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA recommended, but Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI not required. Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod 3. Extension number can Fax Management (I XX) 2 FAX-XX be programmed Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) GCa-g as Auto Dia Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g button. Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g 4. You can Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Ext-XX program the origination Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR extension Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk ony or both the Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 MS-XX origination and Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 MsgOn-XX destination extension. Reca (F 03) Reca 5. You can Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR program the extension Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage number. Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox Intercom Intercom Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 MsgOff-XX Specify Automatic Line Seection: Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension

235 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovtions Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone PAGE 7 or 8 Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music 1. Requires Auto Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Dia button for each Ca Park (I XX) Park 3 extension. Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Pickup-XX 2. Button with Conference Drop (F 06) Drop ights is recommended, but 2 Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) CC1 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) CC2 not required Extension Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) DLPA number can Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) DLPI be programmed as Excusive Hod (F 02) ExHod Auto Dia button. Fax Management (I XX) FAX-XX 2 You can Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I * 7 G) GCa-g 4. program the Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Hunt-g origination extension ony Group Pickup (I 66 G) P/U Grp-g or both the Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) Ext-XX origination 2 and destination exten- Last Number Redia (F 05) LNR Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Loudspk sion. Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) MS-XX 5. You can 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) MsgOff-XX program the 5 extension number. Message Light On (F 09 XX) MsgOn-XX 5 Reca (F 03) Reca Save Number Redia (F 04) SNR Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) SPage Station Lock (F 21) 2 Lock Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) TT-EN Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) VMMsgs-777 Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension

236 Form 2: Maibox Assignments Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Language 10 (11 ) (12 ) (13 ) (14 ) (15 ) Outcaing Assigned Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Outcaing Language Assigned (26 ) (27 ) (28 ) (29 ) (30 ) (31 ) (32 ) (33 ) (34 ) (35 ) (20 ) (21 ) (22 ) (23 ) (24 ) (36 ) (37 ) (38 ) (39 ) (40 ) (25 ) Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. The system comes with a predetermined number of maiboxes. The optiona Maibox Expansion Card doubes the capacity. Maibox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed. Maibox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. A other maiboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time. For system security maiboxes shoud be deeted where they are not needed; for exampe, maiboxes shoud be deeted for extensions in use by auxiiary equipment (such as a fax or doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group. Guest maiboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the maibox number. Unused extension numbers incude: 1) vacant extension jacks in instaed 206 modues and 2) extensions in your DIAL pan higher than the ast extension jack in the ast instaed 206 modue. See Guest Maiboxes in Chapter 5 for more information. Maibox To assign a maibox to an extension other than the factory defaut, cross out the factory defaut and write in the extension to be used. For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an extension number from For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number from To mark an unused maibox for deetion without assigning an extension, cross out the factory defaut. Subscriber Name For every maibox in use, write the name of the maibox subscriber. Maibox Language For each maibox that requires a anguage different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1, write the name of the anguage in this space. Supported anguages are isted on Form 1. Outcaing Assigned For each maibox in use, indicate whether Outcaing is assigned. Programming Maiboxes You can change a maibox assignment by deeting an existing maibox and creating a new one. To program maiboxes, dia [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.

237 Form 3: Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Description Seector Range of Extensions Ext. # or Group # for Code for Direct Extension Seector Code Transfer, Transfer or Announcement # 1 (10 19 ) 2 (20 29 ) 3 (30 39 ) (71 74, ) 8 9 Transfer to Maibox 10 Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. This Menu Definition appies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts. The Seector Code is the first digit diaed by the caer in response to the menu prompts. In Direct Extension Transfer, Seector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Seector Codes et caers dia extension numbers directy. In Seector Code Transfer, Seector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension, Group Caing number, (if avaiabe) or Hunt Group number to which the caer wi be transferred. Use the foowing vaues: PARTNER Pus: or PARTNER Advanced: 11 41, 71 74, or PARTNER II: 10 57, 71 74, or PARTNER 48: 10 57, 71, or Seector Code Transfer ets caers dia a singe digit to reach a singe extension or group, such as the VP of Saes at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774. Seector Code 9 ets caers transfer directy to maibox 10 (receptionist maibox) where they can eave a message. The Description and Seector Code number from this form wi be used to compete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms 4, 4A, 5, and 5A. For Announcement entries in Description, Seector Code, and Announcement # of this form wi be used to compete Forms 3A and 3B. For Direct Extension Transfer... Description Write Direct Extension Transfer. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Leave the factory defaut. Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer... Leave bank. For Seector Extension Transfer... Description the transfer. Write the name of the person or group to receive Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to transfer to the extension, announcement, or group identified in beow. Ext. #, or Group # for Seector Code Transfer... Write the extension, announcement, or group number to receive the transfer. For Announcement... Description Write Announcement. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to hear the Announcement identified in beow. Announcement # Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).

238 Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language Required if Seector Code Transfer is set to Announcement Announcement # : Announcement # : Genera Information Competing this Form After the Announcement pays, you can program the system to hang up or to offer caers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to transfer to an extension), or 0. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie istening to the Announcement. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. Announcements can suppy frequenty requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficienty. An Announcement can be up to four minutes ong. Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided. Recording the Announcement(s) To record the Announcement, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

239 Form 4: Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways Genera Information Competing this Form The Day Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways and Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. The Day Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, Thank you for caing the Any Trave Agency. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as "To speak to someone in saes, press 6. If caers can can choose an Announcement, incude that information. For exampe, For directions to our office, press 4. Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca during norma business hours, incuding the instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Remain on the ine for assistance. Dia 0 for assistance. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Day Menu Prompt To record the Day Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer.

240 Form 5: Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways Genera Information The Night Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways and Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. If Seector Code 9 is eft as the defaut, the prompt shoud instruct caers to press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer. The Night Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, You have reached the Any Trave Agency. Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now and eave a message. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To eave a message for Pat, press 6. Keep in mind that there are no group maiboxes. Competing this Form Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca after norma business hours, incuding instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Dia 9 or remain on the ine to eave a message. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

241 Case Studies Case Study #2 About the Customer Software Mexico is a sma company that deveops PC-based software in Tijuana, Mexico. The company prides itsef on personaized service and customer satisfaction. The owner, Jose Ramirez, empoys a staff of nine incuding a receptionist, a system administrator, five programmers, a customer service representative, and a bookkeeper. Jose and his empoyees speak both Engish and Spanish. Sixty percent of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish; the other 40 percent speak Engish. Jose purchased a PARTNER Pus Reease 4.1 Communications System and a PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4 Voice Messaging System because the integrated system can answer outside cas and offer caers the option of istening to prompts and transferring to extensions in either Engish or Spanish. Receptionist Vera Gonzaez is responsibe for managing the systems; she estabished these facts: The system wi have four outside ines and 12 extensions. Jose and Vera wi have PARTNER-34D phones; the other eight empoyees wi have PARTNER-18D phones. In addition, two standard phones wi be instaed in the waiting room so customers can make oca cas. Jose prefers that Vera hep with various office tasks, so a ines wi ring deayed at extension 10, and the PARTNER MAIL VS system wi answer them. Vera wi act as backup; she wi answer cas from customers who press 0 or stay on the ine for assistance, as we as transfer returned cas. Aso, Vera wi be responsibe for checking the messages in the maibox at extension 10 and forwarding them to the appropriate peope. Cas wi go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system during the day and at night. The majority of Software Mexico s caers have questions about their software or inquiries about bis. Therefore, caers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to the customer service representative or the bookkeeper can do so easiy by pressing a singe digit as expained in the Automated Attendant Service prompt. Since the majority of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish, the system shoud answer outside cas and pay messages and prompts in Spanish. Caers wi have the option of istening to the prompts and messages in Engish. Each empoyee wi have a maibox and Automatic VMS Cover assigned to his or her extension. This arrangement aows caers to eave persona messages when the empoyee is unabe to answer a ca. F-21

242 Case Studies Fiing Out the Panning Forms This section expains how the System Panner for the PARTNER Pus Reease 4.1 Communications System and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4 Voice Messaging System are fied out based on the facts in the Software Mexico case. For brevity, CS refers to the System Panner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system. CS Form A, Page 1 of 3 Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires: Teephone numbers in this coumn represent Software Mexico s four ines. VMS-AA: In this coumn, checks for Lines 01, 02, 03, and 04 indicate that unanswered cas on those ines go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system. CS Form A, Page 2 of 3 System Settings: Receptionist answers cas during business hours? No on this ine indicates that Vera wi backup the voice messaging system. Music on Hod (#602): The bank ine indicates that a Music on Hod device is instaed. Ring on Transfer (#119): NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages wi be payed whie cas are being transferred. Line Coverage: VMS Hunt Deay (#506): The bank ine indicates that the Automated Attendant Service answers outside cas immediatey. VMS Hunt Schedue (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered cas during business hours and after hours. (This setting is the defaut.) F-22

243 Case Studies CS Form B1, Page 1 of 3 Write Name/Description: In this coumn, the names isted for extensions 10 through 19 and 22 and 23 identify the extension assignments. Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension: Checks in these coumns specify the type of teephone each person or ocation has. VMS in the Write Name/Description coumn and checks in the PARTNER MAIL VS coumn indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS modue is instaed in Sot 4 of the Contro Unit. The modue uses extensions 32 and 33, the ast two extensions for that sot. 10 in the Write Transfer Return Ext. No. coumn indicates that when a ca transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered, it goes to extension 10 where Vera can answer it. CS Form B2, Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover: Checks in this coumn indicate that unanswered cas to extensions 10 through 19 automaticay are covered by the Automated Attendant Service. Hunt Group Extensions VMS Ony: In this coumn, check marks for extensions 32 and 33 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS modue be assigned to Hunt Group 7. Automatic Extension Privacy: In this coumn, check marks for the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS modue indicate that Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned to these extensions. This feature prevents subscribers from accidentay picking up cas that are being answered by the voice mai system. CS Form C1, PARTNER-34D Phone The first Form C1 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER-34D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb, Voice Mai Messages, and Voice Maibox Transfer. The Night Service button aows Vera to turn Night Service on and off. When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt pays. When Night Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt pays. Vera can use the Do Not Disturb button to send caers to the genera maibox without ringing the extension first. The Voice Mai Messages button aows Vera to ca Voice Mai Service with one touch. The Voice Maibox Transfer button aows Vera to transfer caers directy to another subscriber s maibox without ringing the extension first. The second Form C1 indicates the buttons programmed on the phone at extension 11: Do Not Disturb, Voice Mai Messages, and Voice Maibox Transfer. F-23

244 Case Studies CS Form C3, PARTNER-18 Phone Form C3 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER-18 phones at extensions 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, and 19: Voice Mai Messages and Voice Maibox Transfer. VMS Form 1 Language Mode: The check mark in the Biingua box indicates that the system aows outside caers to choose between two anguages. Primary Language: The check mark in the Latin American Spanish box indicates that the system answers outside cas in Spanish. The check mark in the U.S. Engish box for Secondary Language indicates that the system can pay messages and prompts in Engish when caers press [ ] [ 1 ]. VMS Form 2 Subscriber Name: In this coumn, the names isted for maiboxes 10 through 19 indicate that a empoyees have maiboxes. Engish in the Maibox Language coumn for extensions 13, 16, and 19 indicates the subscribers at those extensions prefer to isten to prompts and messages in Engish when retrieving messages, recording persona greetings, and accessing other Voice Mai Services. The rest of the subscribers prefer prompts and messages in Spanish, the system s Primary Language. Outcaing Assigned: Yes in this coumn for Jose, the system administrator, and the customer service representative indicates that they have Outcaing privieges, so that they can be notified of new voice mai whie they are away from their offices. VMS Form 3 Description: n this coumn, Direct Extension Transfer for Seector Code 1 and 2 indicates that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension (10 to 29) by entering the extension number. Customer Service in the Description coumn and 18 in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer, or Announcement # coumn for Seector Code 4 indicate that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service, they can press 4 to transfer to extension 18 (the Customer Service representative). Customer Service in the Description coumn and 19 in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer, or Announcement # coumn for Seector Code 5 indicate that when caers get the Automated Attendant Service, they can press 5 to transfer to extension 19 (the Bookkeeper). F-24

245 Case Studies VMS Form 4 When Night Service is off and a ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the prompt on Form 4 in Spanish (the Primary Language). VMS Form 4A When Night Service is off and a ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the prompt on Form 4 in Engish (the Secondary Language) when he or she presses [ ] [ 1 ]. VMS Form 5 When Night Service is on and a ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the prompt on Form 5 in Spanish (the Primary Language). VMS Form 5A When Night Service is on and a ca goes to the Automated Attendant Service, the caer hears the prompt on Form 5 in Engish (the Secondary Language) when he or she presses [ ] [ 1 ]. Post-Instaation Recommendations Since caers can eave a message in the maibox at extension 10, Vera shoud record a genera business greeting for this extension in both Spanish and Engish. The greetings shoud instruct caers to press [ ] [ 1 ] to switch to the other anguage. A empoyees shoud record a persona greeting in both Spanish and Engish. The greetings shoud instruct caers to press [ ] [ 1 ] to switch to the other anguage. In addition, empoyees change the factory-set password for their maiboxes. F-25

246 Case Studies F-26

247 Form A: System Configuration PAGE 1 of 3 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations 1. Customer Biing Name 2. Instaation Address 3. Contact Name Phone Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system ony): No Yes If yes, ca oca teephone company MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA MF-E 7. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first): 4. Person to be Trained Phone Aternate Trainee s Name Phone ( ) ( ) 5. Sod by Lucent Technoogies Saes Force Saesperson s Name Phone 8. System Lines Line Jack No Deaer: Write the Teephone Numbers in order customer desires (ist persona and dedicated ines ast) Write R if Rotary (Dia Puse) Line {#201} Hybrid Mode Ony: Write auxiiary poo 881, 882, 883 or No Poo {#207} Line Coverage You can seect one per ine 1 Ony one of these types per system AA DXD 2 VMS- 3 ASA 4 Hunt 5 AA Group {#607} {#205} {#206} {#204} (write no.) {#206} VMS- 6 Mai {#206} or {#208} Write 7 Ext. No. for Ca Cover {#208} Write User s Name for Persona or Owned Line or Identify Equipment for Dedicated Line Check if Caer ID Service Identify other Loca Teephone Company Subscription Services (e.g., Repeat Ca) 1. Check if desired. Aso see Form B1, AA Extension {#607} coumn. 5. Write group number (1 6) covering this ine. Aso see Form B2, Hunt Group Extensions {#505} Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 DXD, and Form C, Direct Extension Dia Button {#113}. 6. Check desired ine for #206 or enter ine owner s extension number for #208. Aso see Form B1, PARTNER 3. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 VMS-AA, and Form B1, PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS coumn. coumn. 7. Write extension number of ine owner eigibe for Ca Coverage. Aso write ine owner s name in next 4. Check if desired. Aso see Form A, Item 10 ASA, and Form C, Automatic System Answer Button {#111}. coumn.

248 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form A: System Configuration PAGE 2 of 3 Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page System Settings. Write response on ine for each item. Receptionist answers cas during business hours? Write Yes or No. Number of Lines {#104} By defaut, 2 ines per 206 modue and 4 ines per 400 modue are assigned to each extension (or to poo 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write number if different from defaut. Transfer Return Rings {#105} By defaut, a transferred ca rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from defaut. Outside Conference Denia {#109} By defaut, a conference ca can incude 2 outside parties. Write No if 2 outside parties are not aowed. Ca Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II ony) By defaut, a covered ca rings 2 times before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. VMS Cover Rings {#117} By defaut, a ca rings 3 times before going to the user s maibox. Write number (1-9) if different from defaut. Ring on Transfer {#119} By defaut, the caer hears ringing when the ca is transferred. Write NA if music on hod or sience is desired. To Ca Prefix {#402} By defaut, 0 or 1 must be diaed before the area code for a ong distance ca. Write No if 0 or 1 is not required. System Password {#403} By defaut, no password is programmed to override diaing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is desired. Music on Hod {#602} By defaut, the Music on Hod jack on the processor modue is active. Write No if the jack is deactivated. VMS-AA: f VMS-AA is checked, specify the foowing: VMS Hunt Deay {#506} By defaut, VMS answers cas after 2 rings. Write De if cas ring 4 times before VMS answers. VMS Hunt Schedue {#507} By defaut, VMS is on a the time. Check if Day ony or Night ony is desired: Day ony Night ony ASA: (PARTNER II system ony) If ASA is checked, specify the foowing: Automatic System Answer Deay {#110} By defaut, a ca rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from defaut. Automatic System Answer Mode {#121} By defaut, ASA cas are put on hod after the greeting pays. Check if cas shoud continue to ring or be disconnected: Ring Disconnect ASA Record/Payback (I 891) message of up to 10 seconds that caer hears when the ca is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write message beow and record from extension 10 or 11: 10. Line Coverage. Compete items based on Line Coverage seection on Form A, Item 8. DXD: (PARTNER II system ony) If DXD is checked, specify the foowing: Direct Extension Dia Deay {#112} By defaut, a ca rings 2 times before it is answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from defaut. Direct Extension Dia Record/Payback (I 892) message of up to 20 seconds that caer hears when ca is answered with the Direct Extension Dia feature. Write message beow and record from extension 10 or 11:

249 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B1: System Extensions Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see page 5. PAGE 1 of 3 Ext. Jack No. Write Name/Description Identify Teephone Attached to this Extension Identify Auxiiary Equipment Attached to this Extension Write in Other Equipment IMPORTANT: A system dispay phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typicay is the receptionist s extension. Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typicay the System Manager s extension) If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 3. If there is a mix of PARTNER-mode and MLS-mode phones, write P for PARTNER and M for MLS. Write T for touch-tone or R for rotary. If Ca Waiting is desired, check next coumn. Must be standard phone. If immediate diaing is required, use a dedicated ine. Do not assign restrictions that prevent diaing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Aso see Form D, Externa Hotine {#311}. Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding aert extension or 70 for oudspeaker paging system in next coumn. Write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} 6. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usuay extension 10). Aso see Form B2, Identify Group Assignments, VMS Ony. 7. To prevent other extensions from interrupting cas, assign Automatic Extension Privacy {#304} on Form B2. 8. Check corresponding aert extensions in next coumn. To prevent outside cas, remove a outside ines see Lines Not Assigned on Form B2. 9. Aso write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form. 10. Write 1, 2, or B (for Both) to identify which Contact Cosure the extension can activate

250 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form B2: Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defauts for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Pus System. For additiona instructions, see pages 6 and 7. PAGE 1 of Identify Extension Settings if Different than Defaut E NA A NA A NA NA Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option If Different than Defaut Write ine numbers in each coumn to show desired Line Ringing options Immediate Deayed No Ring Write S for Spanish or F for French. 6. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove ines from or assign ines to exten- 7. sions. Write IN for Inside Ony or LOC for Loca Ony to indicate restrictions for a 8. outgoing cas on a ines. 9. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Disaowed Phone Number Lists {#404}. Write ist number (1 8). Aso see Form D, Aowed Phone Number Lists {#407}. Lines 2 Not Assigned Identify Restrictions/Permissions If Different than Defauts Write ine numbers for Line Access Restriction {#302} Outgoing ony No Restriction Incoming ony No Access NA Identify Group Assignments NA NA NA NA Write group number (1 4). Assignments Write group number (1 4). If a oudspeaker is connected and Simutaneous Paging is desired, = Defaut put appropriate extensions in Caing Group 1. Aso see Form C, Simutaneous Paging. A = Assigned or Active Write group number (1 6). E = Engish Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1. NA = Not Assigned or Not Active NR = No Restriction {CTP} = Centraized Teephone Programming

251 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone PAGE 1 of 8 Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Ext. Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 Background Music (F 19) 2 Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) Park 3 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Pickup-XX Drop CC1 CC2 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox Identify extensions programmed as shown: F= Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension 1. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. 2. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. 3. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. 4. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. 5. You can program the extension number.

252 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button {#503} NightSvc Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 OCR Wake Up Service Button {#115} Wake Caer ID Inspect (F 17) ID-Inspect Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) ID-Name Do Not Disturb (F 01) DND Privacy (F 07) Priv VMS Cover (F 15) VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) VIOB PARTNER-18D ony Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 CC2 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension PAGE 3 of 8 1. Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. 2. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. 3. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. 4. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. 5. You can program the extension number.

253 Lucent Technoogies Be Labs Innovations Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone Make as many copies as you need. Use tempate and/or checkist. For additiona instructions, see pages 8 through 13. Check Desired Features Aso write in extension or group number PAGE 3 of 8 Tempate Instructions If desired, write in ine number, dia code feature, or auto dia number If desired, write in Line Ringing (Imm, De, or No) from Form B2 If desired, write in Line Access Restriction (Out, In, or No) from Form B2 Intercom Specify Automatic Line Seection: Intercom Identify extensions programmed as shown: Ext. SAMPLE PARTNER-18D ony Night Service Button {#503} Outgoing Ca Restriction Button {#114} 1 Wake Up Service Button {#115} Caer ID Inspect (F 17) Caer ID Name Dispay (F 16) Do Not Disturb (F 01) Privacy (F 07) VMS Cover (F 15) Voice Interrupt on Busy Tak-Back (F 18) Account Code Entry (F 12) 2 NightSvc OCR Wake ID-Inspect ID-Name DND Priv VMSCover VIOB ACE Background Music (F 19) 2 Music Ca Forwarding/Ca Foow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4 CF-XX XX Ca Park (I XX) 3 Ca Pickup (I 6 XX) Conference Drop (F 06) Contact Cosure 1 (F 41) 2 Contact Cosure 2 (F 42) 2 Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68) Direct Line Pickup-Ide Line (I 8) Excusive Hod (F 02) Fax Management (I XX) 2 Group Caing-Ring/Page (I 7 G or I *7 G) Group Hunt-Ring/Signa (I 77 G or I *77 G) Group Pickup (I 66 G) Intercom Autodia (I XX or I *XX) 2 Last Number Redia (F 05) Loudspeaker Paging (I 70) Manua Signaing (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2 Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5 Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5 Reca (F 03) Save Number Redia (F 04) Simutaneous Paging (I * 70) Station Lock (F 21) 2 Touch-Tone Enabe (F 08) Voice Mai Messages Button (I 777) Voice Maibox Transfer (F 14) Park Pickup-XX Drop CC1 CC2 DLPA DLPI ExHod FAX-XX GCa-g Hunt-g P/U Grp-g Ext-XX LNR Loudspk MS-XX MsgOff-XX MsgOn-XX Reca SNR SPage Lock TT-EN VMMsgs-777 VMBox F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom buttom XX = Extension Requires Auto Dia button for each extension. Button with ights is recommended, but not required. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dia button. You can program the origination extension ony or both the origination and destination extension. You can program the extension number.

254 Form 1: Language Language Mode: Monoingua Biingua Monoingua Mode System Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specifiy Biingua Mode Primary Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specify Biingua Mode Secondary Language: U.S. Engish U.K. Engish Latin American Spanish Canadian French Other specify Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and Secondary Languages. AIso, subscribers can record two persona greetings one in the Primary Language and another in the Secondary Language. Subscribers can have a Maibox Language different from the anguages seected here. Maibox Language is specified on Form 2. Language Mode Check Biingua if the Language Mode shoud be set to Biingua. If you check Biingua, aso see beow; if not, see. Monoingua Mode System Language Check the Primary anguage desired if different from the defaut. Biingua Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the defaut. Biingua Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the defaut. Programming Language To program the Language Mode, as we as the System Language in Monoingua Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages in Biingua Mode, dia [ 1 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

255 Form 2: Maibox Assignments Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Outcaing Language Assigned 10 (11 ) (12 ) (13 ) (14 ) (15 ) (16 ) (17 ) Maibox Subscriber Name Maibox Outcaing Language Assigned (26 ) (27 ) (28 ) (29 ) (30 ) (31 ) (32 ) (33 ) (18 ) (34 ) (19 ) (20 ) (21 ) (22 ) (23 ) (24 ) (35 ) (36 ) (37 ) (38 ) (39 ) (40 ) (25 ) Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. The system comes with a predetermined number of maiboxes. The optiona Maibox Expansion Card doubes the capacity. Maibox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed. Maibox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. A other maiboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time. For system security, maiboxes shoud be deeted where they are not needed; for exampe, maiboxes shoud be deeted for extensions in use by auxiiary equipment (such as a fax or doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group. Guest maiboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the maibox number. Unused extension numbers incude: 1) vacant extension jacks in instaed 206 modues and 2) extensions in your DIAL pan higher than the ast extension jack in the ast instaed 206 modue. See Guest Maiboxes in Chapter 5 for more information. Maibox To assign a maibox to an extension other than the factory defaut, cross out the factory defaut and write in the extension to be used. For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an extension number from For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number from To mark an unused maibox for deetion without assigning an extension, cross out the factory defaut. Subscriber Name For every maibox in use, write the name of the maibox subscriber. Maibox Language For each maibox that requires a anguage different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1, write the name of the anguage in this space. Supported anguages are isted on Form 1. Outcaing Assigned For each maibox in use, indicate whether Outcaing is assigned. Programming Maiboxes You can change a maibox assignment by deeting an existing maibox and creating a new one. To program maiboxes, dia [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.

256 Form 3: Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Description Seector Range of Extensions Ext. # or Group # for Code for Direct Extension Seector Code Transfer, Transfer or Announcement # 1 (10 19 ) 2 (20 29 ) 3 (30 39 ) (71 74, ) 8 9 Transfer to Maibox 10 Genera Information Competing this Form Factory defauts are identified by the symbo. This Menu Definition appies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts. The Seector Code is the first digit diaed by the caer in response to the menu prompts. In Direct Extension Transfer, Seector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Seector Codes et caers dia extension numbers directy. In Seector Code Transfer, Seector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension, Group Caing number, (if avaiabe) or Hunt Group number to which the caer wi be transferred. Use the foowing vaues: PARTNER Pus: or PARTNER Advanced: 11 41, 71 74, or PARTNER II: 10 57, 71 74, or PARTNER 48: 10 57, 71, or Seector Code Transfer ets caers dia a singe digit to reach a singe extension or group, such as the VP of Saes at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774. Seector Code 9 ets caers transfer directy to maibox 10 (receptionist maibox) where they can eave a message. The Description and Seector Code number from this form wi be used to compete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms 4, 4A, 5, and 5A. For Announcement entries in Description, Seector Code, and Announcement # of this form wi be used to compete Forms 3A and 3B. For Direct Extension Transfer... Description Write Direct Extension Transfer. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Leave the factory defaut. Ext. # or Group # for Seector Code Transfer...Leave bank. For Seector Extension Transfer... Description the transfer. Write the name of the person or group to receive Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to transfer to the extension, announcement, or group identified in beow. Ext. #, or Group # for Seector Code Transfer... Write the extension, announcement, or group number to receive the transfer. For Announcement... Description Write Announcement. Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory defaut if you want the caer to dia the corresponding Seector Code to hear the Announcement identified in beow. Announcement # Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).

257 Form 4: Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways Genera Information Competing this Form The Day Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways and Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. The Day Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, Thank you for caing the Any Trave Agency If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca during norma business hours, incuding the instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Remain on the ine for assistance. Dia 0 for assistance. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Day Menu Prompt To record the Day Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To speak to someone in saes, press 6. If caers can can choose an Announcement, incude that information. For exampe, For directions to our office, press 4. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer.

258 Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language Required for Biingua Mode ony if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways Genera Information Competing this Form The Day Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Day Ony or Aways and Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. The Day Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, Thank you for caing the Any Trave Agency Let caers know they can switch back to the Primary Language. For exampe, For Engish, press * 1. Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca during norma business hours, incuding the instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Remain on the ine for assistance. Dia 0 for assistance. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Day Menu Prompt The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. To record the Day Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To speak to someone in saes, press 6. If caers can can choose an Announcement, incude that information. For exampe, For directions to our office, press 4. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer.

259 Form 5: Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways Genera Information The Night Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways and Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. If Seector Code 9 is eft as the defaut, the prompt shoud instruct caers to press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer. The Night Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, You have reached the Any Trave Agency. Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, et caers know they can switch the anguage they hear whie on the ca. For exampe, Para españo, marque * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now and eave a message. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To eave a message for Pat, press 6. Keep in mind that there are no group maiboxes. Competing this Form Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca after norma business hours, incuding instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Dia 9 or remain on the ine to eave a message. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

260 Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language Required for Biingua Mode ony if VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways Genera Information The Night Menu Prompt pays to caers when the VMS Hunt Schedue is set to Night Ony or Aways and Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition. If Seector Code 9 is eft as the defaut, the prompt shoud instruct caers to press 9 to eave a message with the receptionist. It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or ess to avoid confusing the caer. The Night Menu Prompt shoud contain a wecome and a ist of menu options. The wecome shoud introduce the company. For exampe, You have reached the Any Trave Agency. Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM, Monday through Friday. Let caers know they can switch back to the Primary Language. For exampe, For Engish, press * 1. The menu options shoud contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3. If caers can dia extension numbers (Direct Extension Transfer), the prompt shoud instruct caers to dia the extension number. For exampe, If you know the extension of the person you want to reach, dia it now and eave a message. If caers can dia a singe digit to transfer to an extension or group (Seector Code Transfer), the prompt shoud provide instructions such as To eave a message for Pat, press 6. Keep in mind that there are no group maiboxes. Competing this Form Write the message that you want caers to hear when they ca after norma business hours, incuding instructions to the caer for seecting menu options. Suggested options incude: Dia 9 or remain on the ine to eave a message. To hear this menu again, dia * 4. Recording the Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt, dia [ 3 ] from the Programming Main Menu.

261 Gossary A Announcement An informative message that provides frequenty requested information. It is recorded by the System Manager and pays to caers who seect it from an Automated Attendant s Menu. Auto Dia button A programmabe button on a system phone that ets the user dia a series of digits simpy by pressing that button. An Auto Dia button can be used to dia the voice messaging system with one touch. See aso Programmabe button. Automated Attendant Service A component of the voice messaging system that consists of a menu definition and prompt. It provides outside caers with options enabing them to reach an extension, a Hunt Group, or (for PARTNER II systems) a Caing Group, by pressing a singe digit or by diaing an extension or group number. Auxiiary equipment Teecommunications equipment (other than system phones) that can be connected to the contro unit. Auxiiary equipment incudes industry standard devices that can connect directy to the pubic teephone network (such as doorphones or fax machines) as we as devices that require the interface provided by the contro unit (such as a oudspeaker paging system). Automatic VMS Cover A communications system feature that provides voice mai coverage for a subscriber s unanswered transferred and intercom cas. B Biingua Mode A Language Mode setting that aows messages and prompts to be payed in either of two anguages. See aso Monoingua Mode. C Ca Answer Service A component of the voice messaging system that ets caers eave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer to another extension. Caing Group A group of extensions that can be caed simutaneousy by diaing a group caing code. This feature may not be avaiabe on your system; check your Programming and Use guide. See aso Hunt Group. Centraized Teephone Programming A method of teephone programming that ets you program individua extensions in the system from a system dispay phone at extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe). Centraized Teephone Programming is an aternative to Extension Programming. Contro Unit Hardware that connects ines coming into the buiding to the extensions in the system and aso provides system features. Communications system The contro unit and system phones, pus a other teecommunications devices that are connected to the contro unit. Certain reeases of PARTNER Pus, PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, and PARTNER Advanced communications systems can be used with the PARTNER MAIL VS system. D Deayed Ca Handing A communications system feature that aows the communications system to send incoming outside cas to the Automated Attendant Service if the receptionist does not answer by the third ring. See aso Immediate Ca Handing. Dia pan The range of extensions provided for a specific system. The PARTNER Pus system incudes extensions 10-33; the PARTNER ACS incudes extensions 10-41; the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems incude extensions Do Not Disturb A communications system feature that can be used in conjunction with automatic or manua voice coverage to send caers immediatey to a subscriber s maibox rather than ringing the extension first. GL-1

262 Gossary E Extension An endpoint in the system (numbered for PARTNER Pus system; for PARTNER ACS; for PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems) that connects teephones or standard devices, which can be diaed using the Intercom button. See aso Extension number and Programming extension. Extension coverage A feature that aows caers to eave messages or transfer to another extension when the extension caed is busy or not answered, and Automatic VMS Cover is on. Extension jack The six jacks on the ower haf of a 206 modue that aow you to connect phones (or other teecommunications devices) to the contro unit. Extension Line Coverage A voice messaging system feature that ets a subscriber s extension (maibox) be assigned as the owner of a covered ine. When a ca comes in on the covered ine, the system routes the caer to the maibox specified as the ine owner if the ca is not answered. See aso Line Coverage Extension. Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 modue. Extension jack numbers run consecutivey from 10 through 33 for the PARTNER Pus system, 10 through 41 for the PARTNER ACS, and 10 through 57 for the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems. They are used for intercom caing. Extension Programming A method of teephone programming that ets users program their own extensions from their system phones. See aso Centraized Teephone Programming. G Group Ca Distribution A communications system feature that directs incoming cas on specified ines to a Hunt Group for either Automated Attendant Service or Line Coverage. See aso Automated Attendant Service, Hunt Group, VMS Hunt Group, and VMS Line Coverage. H Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred cas in round-robin fashion. Cas to the Hunt Group are directed to the first avaiabe extension in the group, with the extension that answered most recenty being the ast one in the hunt order. See aso Caing Group and VMS Hunt Group. I Immediate Ca Handing A communications system feature that aows the Automated Attendant Service to answer every incoming outside ca on specified ines and pay the Automated Attendant Service day or night menu. See aso Deayed Ca Handing. Industry-standard device A teephone or other teecommunications device that can be connected directy to the pubic teephone network. See aso Standard phone. Intercom ca A ca that is made to another system extension. L Language Mode See Biingua Mode and Monoingua Mode. Line Coverage Extension A communications system feature that directs incoming cas on a specific ine to a specific extension. Line jack The ocation on 206 and 400 modues that aow you to connect outside ines to the contro unit. Line number The number assigned to each ine jack on a 206 or 400 modue. Line jack numbers run consecutivey from 01 through 12 (for a PARTNER Pus system), 01 through 15 (for a PARTNER ACS), or from 01 through 24 (for PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems). Line Ownership A voice messaging system feature that ets you program VMS Line Coverage. See aso Group Ca Distribution and VMS Line Coverage. GL-2

263 Gossary M Maibox A storage area for messages associated with a system subscriber. Maibox Language The anguage assigned to a subscriber s maibox. Maibox Password A code of up to four digits that subscribers enter to og in to the voice messaging system. A password is used to keep messages confidentia. Menu Definition A voice messaging system feature that ets you customize the Automated Attendant Service transfer options avaiabe to outside caers. Menu Prompt The customized day or night message that an outside caer hears after the Automated Attendant Service answers the ca. Monoingua Mode A Language Mode setting that aows messages and prompts to be payed in one of severa avaiabe anguages. See aso Biingua Mode. Music On Hod system Equipment that ets you pay recorded music or messages to caers who are paced on hod. A musicon-hod audio source must be connected to the processor modue in the contro unit. N Night Service A communications system feature that is used in conjunction with Automated Attendant Service to activate the Night Menu Prompt. O On-touch Intercom Caing button See Auto Dia button. Outcaing A voice messaging system feature that, when assigned to a subscriber, aows the subscriber to have the system ca a pager or teephone number according to a predefined schedue whenever a new message is received in the subscriber s voice maibox. P Primary Language In Biingua Mode, the anguage caers initiay hear when they ca in to the voice messaging system. See aso Secondary Language. Programmabe button A system phone button that does not have a ine assigned; it can be set up to dia a number or access a feature. Programming extension An extension from which you can program the communications system. It can be either extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe). R Receptionist The person who primariy is responsibe for answering outside cas. This is the person at extension 10. S Secondary Language In Biingua Mode, the anguage caers have the option of hearing when they ca in to the voice messaging system. See aso Primary Language. Seector Code A singe digit (1-9) used to define transfer options for outside caers on the Automated Attendant Service menu. See aso Menu Definition and Menu Prompt. Send A Cas A communications system feature that ets subscribers use Do Not Disturb to send caers immediatey to their maibox (cas do not ring the extension first) provided voice mai coverage is on at the extension. Standard phone An industry-standard touch-tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home. Some standard phones incude specia feature buttons for frequenty used caing functions. See aso Industry-standard device. Subscriber A user who is assigned a maibox. System Language In Monoingua Mode, the anguage caers hears when they ca in to the voice messaging system. GL-3

264 Gossary System Manager The person responsibe for managing both the communications and voice messaging systems. System phone A teephone that is specificay designed for use with PARTNER systems. Modes incude the PARTNER-34D, PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER-6, MLS-34D, MLS-18D, MLS-12, MLS-12D, MLS-6, MDC 9000, and MDW 9000 phones. System programming Procedures that aow you to customize the communications system settings. System programming requires a system dispay phone and is done from extension 10 (or 11 if avaiabe). T Teephone programming Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individua users, incuding the assignment of features to programmabe buttons. Teephone Programming can be done either centray or from the user s own extension. See aso Centraized Teephone Programming and Extension Programming. Tutor A voice messaging system feature that ets any communications system user access and isten to information about their phone and commony-used communications system features. 206 modue A system modue that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside ines and up to six extensions. VMS Hunt Schedue A communications system feature that aows you to set the communications system to route outside cas to the Automated Attendant Service aways, ony when the Night Service button at the receptionist s extension is on, or ony when the Night Service button is off. VMS Line Coverage A voice messaging system feature that ets the System Manager associate a persona ine with a specific subscriber s maibox for voice mai coverage. See aso Group Ca Distribution and Line Ownership Voice Mai Service A component of the voice messaging system that aows subscribers to isten to and deete messages, record persona greetings, and change their passwords. It aso aows the System Manager to program the voice messaging system. Voice Maibox See Maibox. Voice Maibox Transfer button A button on a system phone that enabes the user to transfer a ca directy to a subscriber s maibox. Voice messaging system (VMS) An optiona device that automates ca handing: answers cas and routes them to caer designated extension; permits caers to eave messages at unanswered extensions; and aows subscribers to retrieve their messages. See aso Automated Attendant Service, Ca Answer Service, and Voice Mai Service. V VMS Cover button A button on a system phone that aows a subscriber to turn voice mai coverage on and off manuay at that extension. See aso Automatic VMS Cover. VMS Hunt Deay A communications system feature that ets you set the Automated Attendant to hande cas using either Immediate Ca Handing or Deayed Ca Handing. See aso Deayed Ca Handing and Immediate Ca Handing VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7, reserved by the communications system to identify extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware. See aso VMS Hunt Deay and VMS Hunt Schedue. GL-4

265 Index A Aowed Number List, 4-23 Announcements, 1-6, 5-18, 5-21 Automated Attendant Announcement initia programming, 4-11 Automated Attendant Service Announcements, 1-6, 5-18 communications system options, 1-8, 1-10 factory-set messages, 1-7 Music-On-Hod, 1-11 overview, 1-6 programming, 4-8, 4-19, 5-18 testing the operation of, 4-29 using Group Ca Distribution for, 5-34 Automatic Extension Privacy, 4-20 Automatic VMS Cover, 1-12, 4-25, 5-51 B Button programming Do Not Disturb, 4-27, 5-61 VMS Cover, 4-26, 5-60 Voice Mai Messages, 4-28, 5-62 Voice Maibox Transfer, 4-27, 5-61 C Ca Answer Service communications system options, 1-12 factory-set message, 1-11 initia programming, 4-24 overview, 1-11 testing the operation of, 4-31 Ca handing deayed, 1-9 immediate, 1-9 Caing Group, 5-7 Capacities, 5-36 Changing anguage maibox, 5-47 CO Line Coverage assigning Line Ownership, 4-18 initia programming, 4-24 overview, 1-12, 5-52 Communications system, 1-1 Communications system programming dia pan for maiboxes, 5-39 diapad overays for, 3-3 entering programming mode, 3-3 initia setup, 4-1, 4-19 methods of, 3-2 overview, 3-1 panning forms, 3-2 D Day Menu Prompt changing the, 5-24, 5-30 description, 1-6 factory-set prompt, 1-7 initia programming, 4-11 istening to, 5-23, 5-28 sampe message, 5-21 Deayed ca handing, 1-9 Dia Pan, 5-39 Diapad key sequences, xii Direct Extension Transfer, 5-20 Disaowed Number List, 4-22 Do Not Disturb, 1-12 programming a button, 4-27 Do Not Disturb button, 5-61 E Extension coverage automatic, 1-12, 4-25 immediate, 1-12 manua, 1-12 overview, 1-12 Extensions transfer return, 4-4 VMS (Hunt Group 7), 4-3 Extensions coverage manua, 4-26 F FCC information, B-1 IN-1

266 Index G Group Ca Distribution for Automated Attendant Service, 5-34 for CO Line Coverage, 5-58 initia programming, 4-19 overview, 1-8 Guest maiboxes creating, 5-44 deeting, 5-42 for receptionist, 5-6 overview, 1-14, 5-40 H Hepine, 6-1 Hunt Group, 5-7 I Immediate ca handing, 1-9 Instaation guideines, 2-1 Maibox Expansion Card, 2-5 voice messaging system modue, 2-2 K Key sequences, xii L Line Ownership and Group Ca Distribution, 5-58 and maibox deetion, 5-42 assigning, 5-55 changing, 5-56 checking, 5-54 deeting, 5-57 initia programming, 4-18 Login for voice messaging system, 3-5 M Maibox Expansion Card description, 1-1 Maiboxes assigning Outcaing privieges, 4-17 capacity, 5-36 checking the status of, 5-42 creating, 5-44 deeting, 5-42 dia pan for, 5-39 for guests, 1-14 initia programming, 4-15, 4-16 overview, 5-36 re-initiaizing, 4-16, 4-17, 5-46, 5-47, 5-48 Main menu, 3-6 Manua VMS Cover, 1-12 Menu definition changing the, 5-24, 5-30 description, 5-20 initia programming, 4-8, 4-11 istening to, 5-22, 5-27, 5-28 overview, 5-20 Menu prompt, 5-20 Message ight, 5-42 Music On Hod, 1-11 N Night Menu Prompt changing the, 5-32 description, 1-6 factory-set prompt, 1-7 initia programming, 4-10, 4-13 istening to, 5-23, 5-28 sampe message, 5-21 Night Service initia programming, 4-21 overview, 1-8 O Outcaing guideines, 5-3 verfying operation, 5-4 Outcaing privieges assigning, 4-17, 5-49 removing, 5-49 Outcaing Ca Restriction, 1-15, 4-4 IN-2

267 Index P PARTNER MAIL VS Reease 4 features, 1-2 supported configurations, 4-2 upgrading, 4-2 Password for subscribers, 1-13 for the System Manager, 5-2 reinitiaizing, 5-45 Persona greeting, 1-13 Panning forms communications system, 3-2 voice messaging system, 3-4 Probems soving, 6-1 Programming communications system, 3-1 teephone buttons, 4-26 voice messaging system, 3-4 Programming Main Menu accessing the, 3-6 description, 3-6 Programming overays, 3-3 R Receptionist duties, 5-6 extension 10, 5-36 maibox, 5-42 Reference materias, xv Reinitiaizing maibox, 5-46 password, 5-45 Rotary phones, 5-22 S Security, 1-15 Outcaing feature, 1-15 Security poicy, 1-16 Seector Code Transfer, 5-20 Seector codes, 5-20 Support, 6-1 customer, 6-1 System Manager duties, 5-1 password for, 5-2 System test, 4-29 T Teephone button programming, 4-26 Teephone company notification, B-2 Terminoogy, xi Transfer for Automated Attendant Service caers, 5-20 using * 8, 5-22 Transfer Return Extension overview, 1-10 Transfer return extensions, 4-4 Tutor Service, 1-3, 5-5 abes, xv menu, 5-5 V VMS Cover, 5-42 VMS Cover button, 4-26, 5-60 VMS extensions determining, 2-3, 5-41 specifying, 4-3 VMS Hunt Deay changing the setting, 5-34 initia programming, 4-20 overview, 1-9 VMS Hunt Schedue changing the setting, 5-35 initia programming, 4-20 overview, 1-8 Voice mai coverage and groups, 5-7 for CO ines, 1-12 for extensions, 1-12, 4-25, 4-26 Voice Mai Messages button, 4-28, 5-62 Voice Mai Service factory-set message, 1-14 initia programming, 4-15 overview, 1-13 testing the operation of, 4-29 Voice Maibox Transfer description, 1-13 programming a button, 4-27 Voice Maibox Transfer button, 5-61 Voice messaging system features, 1-1 overview, 1-4 Voice messaging system programming guideines, 3-7 initia setup, 4-1 ogin, 3-5 main menu, 3-6 method of, 3-5 overview, 3-4 panning forms, 3-4 IN-3

268 Ca Voice Mai Service (Press Intercom ) Enter Login (Press 9 9 # ) Enter Maibox Password (Press for factory defaut and # ) Seect Programming Main Menu (Press 9 ) Language (Press[ 1 ]) Automated Attendant (Press[ 3 ]) Maiboxes (Press[ 4 ]) Line Ownership (Press[ 6 ]) Language Mode (Press[ 1 ]) Day Menu (Press[ 1 ]) Maibox Number Scan Line (Enter Number Ownership +[ # ]) (Press[ 2 ]) Monoingua Mode (Press[ 1 ]) Yes Biingua No Mode? Yes Maibox Number Exists? No Assign Line Ownership (Press[ 4 ]) Biingua Mode (Press[ 2 ]) Pay Primary Day Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ]) Pay Day Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ]) Reinitiaize Password (Press[ 3 ]) Create Maibox (Press[ 4 ]) Modify Line Ownership (Press[ 6 ]) System Language (Press[ 2 ]) Pay Secondary Pay Menu Day Prompt Definition & Annc. (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ]) (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ]) Reinitiaize Maibox (Press[ 4 ]) Deete Line Ownership (Press[ * ][ 3 ]) Yes Biingua No Mode? Pay Primary Language (Press[ 1 ][ 2 ]) Pay System Language (Press[ 2 ]) Pay Menu Definition & Annc. (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ]) Modify Menu Definition and/or Primary Day Prompt (Press[ 6 ]) Modify Menu Definition and/or Day Prompt (Press[ 6 ]) Administer Outcaing (Press[ 5 ]) Program Maibox Language (Press[ 6 ]) System Reset Save A (Press [ 9 ][ 8 ][ 9 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 8 ]) Pay Secondary Language (Press[ 2 ][ 2 ]) Modify System Language (Press[ 6 ]) Night Menu (Press[ 2 ]) Deete Maibox (Press[ * ][ 3 ]) Modify Primary Language (Prees[ 1 ][ 6 ]) Yes Biingua No Mode? Modify Secondary Language (Press[ 2 ][ 6 ]) Pay Primary Night Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ]) Pay Night Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ]) Pay Secondary Night Prompt (Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ]) Modify Night Prompt (Press[ 6 ]) Modify Primary Night Prompt (Press[ 6 ][ 1 ]) Modify Secondary Night Prompt (Press[ 6 ][ 2 ])

269 Programming Fowchart START A REFER to CS Form B1 to identify the extensions for the PARTNER MAIL VS system. REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if the Yes Modify the Language Mode. system shoud be programmed for Biingua Mode. V1 No REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if a Use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if a different Primary Language is assign the PARTNER MAIL VS different System Language is specified. specified. If so, modify the Primary extensions to Hunt Group 7. If so, modify the System Language. Language. C1 V2 V3 Use Transfer Return Extension (#306)* to specify extension 10 as the transfer return extension for each of the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions. C2 Go To B REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if a different Secondary Language is specified. If so, modify the Secondary Language. V3 Go To A Go To B Key: CS Refers to the System Panner forms for the Communications System. VMS Refers to the forms for the Voice Messaging System. C# Refers to the quick reference programming procedure for the Communications System. V# Refers to a quick reference programming procedure for the Voice Messaging System. Note: C#/V# procedures foow this fowchart. * In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.

270 Programming Fowchart B C Program the Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt. REFER to VMS Form 2 to identify defaut maiboxes: REFER to VMS Form 3, Coumn C to Yes Program the appropriate extension, determine if Seector Code Transfer or announcement, or group numbers for Announcement is used. Seector Code Transfer as specified on Form 3, Coumn C. Monoingua V4 No Biingua V5 Record the Announcement(s) as specified on Form 3A. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, aso record the Announcement(s) in the Secondary Language as specified on Form 3B*. Monoingua V10 Biingua V11 REFER to VMS Form 4 to determine if Yes Record the Day Menu Prompt as a Day Menu Prompt is used. specified on Form 4. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, aso record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language as specified on Form 4A. Monoingua V4 Biingua V5 If there are extensions that do not require maiboxes, use Deete Maiboxes to remove the maiboxes from those extensions V17 If other extensions require maiboxes, use Create Maiboxes to assign avaiabe maiboxes. V18 Refer to VMS Form 2, Coumn C, to see if a different Maibox Language is specified for any active maiboxes. If so, modify Maibox Language. V21 Refer to VMS Form 2, Coumn D, to see if Outcaing is assigned for any active maiboxes. If so, assign outcaing. V22 No REFER to VMS Form 5 to determine if Yes Record the Night Menu Prompt as a Night Menu Prompt is used. specified on Form 5. If the system is set for Biingua Mode, aso record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language as specified on Form 5A. Monoingua V8 Biingua V9 Go To D No REFER to the Programing and Use guide for the communications system for instructions on setting up Music On Hod. No Go To C * A maximum of two Announcements can be recorded in Monoingua Mode. In Biingua Mode, two Announcements can be recorded in the Primary Language and two Announcements can be recorded in the Secondary Language.

271 Programming Fowchart D Refer to CS Form A, Page 1 of Use Group Ca Distribution (#206)* 2, Line Coverage to see if VMS- Yes to assign VMS-AA ines to Hunt AA is specified for any ines. Group 7. C3 No Go To E Refer to CS Form A, Page 2 of 2, to check VMS Hunt Deay and VMS Hunt Schedue settings for the PARTNER MAIL VS system. If Immediate and Aways are checked, this site uses immediate ca handing a the time (day and night). Yes No Leave VMS Hunt Deay (#506) at factory setting (Immediate) If Immediate and Day Ony are Yes Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to checked, this site uses immediate Day Ony C6 ca handing ony during the day. Program a Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10 C9 Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the VMS extensions. C10 No Leave VMS Hunt Deay (#506) at factory setting (Immediate) Leave VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) at factory setting (Aways) Program a Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10 C9 Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the VMS extensions. C10 Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) at No Deayed C5 Leave VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) at If Deayed and Aways are Yes factory setting (Aways) checked, this site uses deayed Program a Night Service Button ca handing a the time (day (#503) at extension 10 C9 and night). If Deayed and Day Ony are Yes checked, this site uses deayed ca handing ony during the day. No Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) to Deayed Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Day Ony Program a Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10 C6 C9 C10 If Immediate and Night Ony are Yes Leave VMS Hunt Deay (#506) at checked, this site uses immediate factory setting (Immediate) ca handing ony during the night. Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Day Ony C6 Program a Night Service Button (#503) at extension 10 C9 Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the VMS extensions. No C10 Go To E Go To E Go To E Go To E Go To E If Deayed and Night Ony are Yes Set VMS Hunt Deay (#506) to checked, this site uses deayed Deayed ca handing ony during the night. Set VMS Hunt Schedue (#507) to Night Ony Program a Night Service * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check Button (#503) at extension 10 the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. C5 C6 C9 Go To E

272 E Refer to CS Form A, Page 1 of 2, Line Yes Use Group Ca Distribution (#206)* to Coverage to see if any ines are program the persona ines as VMS checked off in the VMS-Mai coumn. Line Coverage for Hunt Group 7. C3 Refer to VMS Form 6, Coumns A and D to assign Line Ownership to specified ines. V24 No Refer to CS Form A, Page 1 of 2, Line Yes Use Line Coverage Extension (#208) Coverage to see if any extension to program ine ownership for those numbers are specified in the VMS- extensions. Mai coumn. C4 No Refer to CS Form B2 to determine if Yes Assign Automatic VMS Cover (#310) Automatic VMS Cover (#310) is to those extensions. assigned for any extensions. C7 No Refer to CS Form A, Page 2 of 2, to Yes Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to see if a different number of VMS program the number of rings. Cover Rings (#117) is specified. C8 No Refer to CS Form C to determine if a Yes Program a VMS Cover button on VMS Cover button is specified for any the system phone at those extensions. extensions. C11 No Refer to CS Form C to determine if a Yes Program a Do Not Disturb button on Do Not Disturb button is specified for the system phone at each of those any extensions. extensions. C12 No Refer to CS Form C to determine if a Yes Program a Voice Maibox Transfer Voice Maibox Transfer button is button on the system phone at those specified for any extensions. extensions. C13 No Program a Voice Mai Messages button on a subscribers system phones for one-touch access to the voice messaging system. C14 No Test the system (See Ch. 4.). * In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. VMS Cover Rings (#117) may not be avaiabe on your system. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.

273 PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ] ENTER your Password (factory setting is 1234) and [ # ] PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming Main Menu TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS [ ] [ 4 ] TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS [ ] [ # ] TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS [ ] [ 7 ] TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS [ ] [ ] [ 9 ] Language Automated Attendant Automated Attendant REFER to Form 1 PRESS [ 1 ] to program Language REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 4, and 5 PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 4, 4A, 5, and 5A PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service TO MODIFY THE LANGUAGE MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Language Mode PRESS [ 1 ] for Monoingua Mode or [ 2 ] for Biingua Mode V1 TO MODIFY THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V2 TO MODIFY THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY LANGUAGES BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language PRESS [ 1 ] for Primary Language PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm PRESS [ ] [ # ] PRESS [ 2 ] for Secondary Language PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V3 TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 1 ] for Seector Code Transfer ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or Caing Group number and [ # ] To program another Seector Code for Seector Code Transfer, repeat PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve a changes V4 TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm PRESS [ 3 ] to pay the Announcement recorded for the Seector Code ENTER an Announcement number PRESS [ 1 ] to rerecord the Announcement PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to move up a menu eve PRESS [ ] [ # ] to continue without programming Seector Codes PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V10 TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Seector Code for Direct Extension Transfer, repeat PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve a changes V12 TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement ENTER an Announcement number PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ ] [ # ] to continue without programming another Seector Code, or To program another Seector Code, repeat PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve a changes V14

274 PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ] ENTER your Password (factory setting is 1234) and [ # ] PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming Main Menu TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS [ ] [ 4 ] TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS [ ] [ # ] TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS [ ] [ 7 ] TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS [ ] [ ] [ 9 ] Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 3B, 4, 4A, 5, and 5A PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 3B, 4, 4A, 5, and 5A PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 3B, 4, 4A, 5, and 5A PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code [ 1 ] through [ 9 ] PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 1 ] for Seector Code Transfer ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or Caing Group number and [ # ] To program another Seector Code for Seector Code Transfer, repeat PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V5 TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm PRESS [ 3 ] to pay the Announcement recorded for the Seector Code ENTER an Announcement number PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ ] [ # ] to move up a menu eve PRESS [ ] [ # ] to move up another menu eve PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V11 TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Seector Code for Direct Extension Transfer, repeat PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V13 TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER a Seector Code 1 through 9 PRESS [ 9 ] to modify PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement ENTER an Announcement number PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve the Announcements PRESS [ ] [ # ] to continue without programming another Seector Code, or PRESS [ ] [ # ] to program another Seector Code, repeat PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve - PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V15 TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 2 ] for payback of the Day Menu definition PRESS [ 2 ] for payback of the Seector Codes PRESS [ 1 ] to pay the recorded Announcement assigned to the Seector Code, or PRESS [ # ] to skip V6

275 PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program The PARTNER MAIL VS System TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ] ENTER your Password (factory setting is 1234) and [ # ] PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming Main Menu TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS [ ] [ 4 ] TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS [ ] [ # ] TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS [ ] [ 7 ] TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS [ ] [ ] [ 9 ] Automated Attendant Maiboxes Line Ownership REFER to Forms 3, 3A, 3B, 4, 4A, 5 and 5A PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated Attendant Service TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu PRESS [ 2 ] for payback of the Day Menu definition PRESS [ 2 ] for payback of the Seector Codes PRESS [ 1 ] to pay the Primary Language Announcement assigned to the Seector Code, or PRESS [ 2 ] to pay the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Seector Code, or PRESS [ # ] to skip V7 TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve V8 TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu PRESS [ 6 ] to modify PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS [ 1 ] after recording PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve PRESS [ # ] to approve a changes V9 REFER to Form 2 PRESS [ 4 ] to program Maiboxes TO PLAY A MAILBOX S STATUS ENTER a maibox number and [ # ], or PRESS [ # ] for the first maibox PRESS [ # ] to pay the next existing maibox s status V16 TO DELETE A MAILBOX ENTER a maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ ] [ 3 ] to deete the maibox PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V17 TO CREATE A MAILBOX ENTER the new maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ 4 ] to create the new maibox V18 TO REINITIALIZE A PASSWORD ENTER a maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ 3 ] to reset the password to 1234 V19 TO REINITIALIZE A MAILBOX ENTER the maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ 4 ] to reinitiaize the maibox PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V20 TO MODIFY A MAILBOX S LANGUAGE ENTER the maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ 6 ] to program Language PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER the number of the desired anguage PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V21 TO ASSIGN/REMOVE OUTCALLING FOR A MAILBOX ENTER the maibox number and [ # ] PRESS [ 5 ] to administer Outcaing PRESS [ 9 ] to assign Outcaing, or PRESS [ 6 ] to remove Outcaing To assign/remove Outcaing for another maibox, repeat V22 REFER to Form 6 PRESS [ 6 ] to program Line Ownership TO SCAN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS [ 2 ] to scan ENTER the ine number and [ # ], or PRESS [ # ] to scan the first ine number that has an owner LISTEN to the ine owner s name and maibox number PRESS [ # ] to scan the next ine V23 TO ASSIGN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS [ 4 ] to assign ENTER the ine number and [ # ] ENTER the maibox number and [ # ] V24 TO MODIFY LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS [ 6 ] to modify ENTER the ine number and [ # ] ENTER the new owner s maibox number and [ # ] TO DELETE LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS [ ] [ 3 ] to deete ENTER the ine number and [ # ] PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm V25 V26

276 PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Pace the Programming Overay on the dia pad of the system dispay phone at extension 10* TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] DIAL [ # ] and three-digit procedure SETTINGS PRESS [ System Program ] code PRESS [ Next Data ] or [ Prev Data ] PRESS [ System Program ] Exampe: [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 5 ] for Hunt Group ENTER System Password if required Extensions TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PRESS [ Remove ] PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS [ Next Procedure ] or PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] [ Prev Procedure ] HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL #505 PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned to group 2 = Not assigned to group PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next extension C1 TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL #306 DIAL the extension number DIAL 10 (the receptionist s extension) PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next extension C2 = Factory Setting = Button with Lights Required GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL #206 PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL a ine number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = VMS Line Cover PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another ine C3 LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL #208** DIAL a ine number DIAL an extension number PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another ine PRESS [ Remove ] to unassign ownership C4 VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL #506 DIAL 1 = Immediate 2 = Deayed VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL #507 DIAL 1 = Aways 2 = Day Ony 3 = Night Ony C5 C6 AUTOMATIC VMS COVER DIAL #310 DIAL an extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another extension C7 VMS COVER RINGS DIAL #117** DIAL one digit (1-9) for the number of rings before the ca is sent to the voice messaging system) = 3 rings C8 NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON DIAL #503 DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned 3 = Seect button** then PRESS a programmabe button (to assign Night Service to that button) If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned, the Night Service button moves from the od button to the new button you seect. C9 AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL #304 DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 = Assigned 2 = Not Assigned PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another extension C10 * ** Some systems aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. Line Coverage Extension (#208), VMS Cover Rings (#117), and option 3 of the Night Service Button (#503) procedure may not be avaiabe on your system. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.

277 PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Pace the Programming Overay on the dia pad of the system dispay phone at extension 10* TO START CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] PRESS [ System Program ] [ System Program ] PRESS [ Centra Te Program ] DIAL the extension number to be programmed Buttons on which ines are assigned for the extension ight up to show the current Line Ringing setting; remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dia numbers or features. TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO AT THE SAME EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON After you program one feature, continue PRESS the programmed button with the instructions in the box for the PRESS [ Mic ] next feature. TO END CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR PROGRAMMING ANOTHER EXTENSION PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ] PRESS [ Centra Te Program ] DIAL the new extension s number VMS COVER VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER PRESS a programmabe button with PRESS a programmabe button ights PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 4 ] PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 5 ] C11 DO NOT DISTURB PRESS a programmabe button with ights PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ] C12 C13 VOICE MAIL MESSAGES AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS a programmabe button PRESS eft [ Intercom ] DIAL [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] C14 = Button with Lights Required * Some systems aow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system. In some countries, the procedure code for Group Ca Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.